2017
2017 GIULIA
GIULIA QUADRIFOGLIO
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of
FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.
OWNER’S MANUAL
17GA-126-AC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
DEAR CUSTOMER
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible
way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.
Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best
performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become
familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle
behavior on different road surfaces.
This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving,
care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.
In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The
New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the
people at Alfa Romeo.
For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI
48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling
Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital
components of the supply system.
For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
Starting The Engine
Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and
then push the engine START/STOP button.
Parking On Flammable Material
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other
flammable material: fire hazard.
Respecting The Environment
The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment.
Electrical Accessories
If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized
dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.
Scheduled Servicing
Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and
safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.
VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS
Accessories Purchased By The Owner
Warning!
Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants
could even be fatally injured.
If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system,
etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer.
Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs
to be integrated with a more powerful battery.
Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the
ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing
obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.).
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by
FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices
FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in
compliance with manufacturer's specifications.
Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been
installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by
FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones
Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a
separate antenna is mounted externally.
Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of
approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.
Caution!
The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to
malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.
If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the
Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Operating Instructions
Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the
perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in
the text as appropriate.
The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual
arrangement of your vehicle.
To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current
chapter at the side of each even page.
Warnings And Cautions
While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use
of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.
Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
Personal Safety:
Vehicle Safety:
Note: This Owner’s Manual describes the Quadrifoglio model. Optional contents, including equipment meant for
specific Markets or particular models, are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the
information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside
of the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if-equipped).
All data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC
aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to
the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact your authorized dealer.
Symbols
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It
is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.
READ THE OWNER
HANDBOOK
DO NOT TOUCH WITH
HANDS
IT CAN START
AUTOMATICALLY ALSO
WITH ENGINE OFF
PROTECT YOUR EYES
DO NOT OPEN THE CAP
WHEN THE ENGINE IS
HOT
DO NOT OPEN: HIGH
PRESSURE GAS
KEEP CHILDREN AT A
DISTANCE
BURSTING
MOVING PARTS KEEP
PARTS OF YOUR BODY
AND CLOTHES AWAY
DO NOT APPROACH
FLAMES
CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
03016S0002EM
Front View
1 — Headlights 4 — Doors
2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment
3 — Exterior Mirrors 6 — Windshield
9
REAR VIEW
03026S0002EM
Rear View
1 — Tail Lights
2 — Trunk Lid
10
INSTRUMENT PANEL
03036S0050EM
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System
2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment
3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag
4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Audio System
11
VEHICLE INTERIOR
03046S0001EM
Vehicle Interior
1 — Driver Seat 4 — Hazard Warning Lights
2 — Power W indows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Pro System
3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In this section, you will find important
information to help you become familiar
with the features needed to operate
your vehicle, and how they function.
KEYS ....................14
IGNITION SYSTEM ...........16
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ........18
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...............19
DOORS ...................20
SEATS ...................26
HEAD RESTRAINTS ...........29
STEERING WHEEL............31
MIRRORS .................33
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...........34
INTERIOR LIGHTS ............37
WINDSHIELD WIPERS .........39
CLIMATECONTROL ..........42
POWERWINDOWS ...........49
HOOD ...................50
TRUNK ..................51
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........53
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
SYSTEMS .................57
ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS .......57
13
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition
system. This system includes a key fob
and a keyless push button ignition.
The Remote Keyless Entry key fob
allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and trunk or activate the Panic Alarm
from distances. The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
PANIC Function
The key fob contains a PANIC button.
Should you ever feel threatened, push
this button and the vehicle security
alarm will sound.
To activate the PANIC function, push
and hold the PANIC button for at least
one second. When the panic alarm is
active, the headlights turn on, the turn
signals flash, the horn honks
intermittently, and all internal adjustable
lights turn on. The panic alarm will
remain active for three minutes, and
can be deactivated:
By pushing the PANIC button again.
Automatically if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
In both cases, the panic alarm is
immediately deactivated.
Warning!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Operation
Door And Trunk Lid Unlock
Briefly pushing the unlock button on the
key fob will unlock the doors and trunk
lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash
the turn signals once (if activated from
the Information and Entertainment
System).
Push and release the unlock button on
the key fob once to unlock the driver
side front door or twice within one
second to unlock all doors and the
trunk lid.
The current unlock setting can be
changed through the Information and
Entertainment System menu, so that
the system unlocks:
All doors unlock on the first push of
the key fob unlock button.
Unlock the driver door on the first
push of the key fob unlock button.
Flashing of the turn signals upon
locking/unlocking the doors and
activation of the courtesy light upon
unlocking the doors can be activated or
deactivated through the Information
and Entertainment System. For further
information, refer to the Information and
Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
The doors can also be unlocked by
using the emergency key, located inside
the key fob.
04016S0001EM
Key Fob
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door And Trunk Lid Lock
Briefly pushing the lock button on the
key fob will lock the doors and trunk lid,
turn off the internal lights, and flash the
turn signals (if activated in the
Information and Entertainment System).
If one or more doors are open, these
doors will also lock, and this is
indicated by a rapid flashing of the turn
signals. The doors prepare for locking,
which becomes active from the
moment they are closed. The doors will
unlock again only if the key fob is
detected inside the passenger
compartment.
The doors can be locked by using the
emergency key in the driver’s side door
lock.
Trunk Lid Opening
Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob
button twice to open the trunk lid. The
turn signals will flash to indicate that the
trunk lid has been opened.
Remote Start
The remote start button on the key fob
enables engine starting (push the
button twice to start the engine).
Car Finder
Push the lock or unlock button to
remotely and temporarily turn on turn
signals and headlights.
This is useful for finding the vehicle
easily in a crowded area like a parking
garage, for example.
Pushing the lock or unlock button again
will restart the lights turn on timer (if the
parking lights functions was already
active, it will remain active).
This function is available only if the
doors are closed.
Replacing The
Electronic Key Fob
Battery
To replace the battery, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the sides of the key fob inward
and extract the cover pulling
downwards.
2. Remove the emergency key from its
housing.
3. Remove the battery plug by rotating
it counter clockwise.
4. Remove the battery from its slot and
replace it with a new one of the same
type.
04016S0002EM
Key Fob Cover Removal
04016S0003EM
Removing Emergency Key
04016S0004EM
Removing Battery Plug
15
Proceed in reverse order to reassemble
the key.
Caution!
The battery replacement operation must be
done with care, in order not to damage the
electronic key.
Request For Additional
Keys
The system can recognize up to eight
key fobs with remote control.
To guarantee that the engine starts and
the vehicle operates correctly, use only
electronic key fobs specifically coded
for the vehicle’s electronics.
If an electronic key fob is coded for a
vehicle, it cannot be used on any other
vehicle.
Duplicating Keys
If you need a replacement key fob, go
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
IGNITION SYSTEM
Operation
To activate the keyless ignition, the key
fob must be inside the passenger
compartment.
The keyless ignition has the following
modes:
STOP: engine off, steering locked.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central
door locking system, alarm, etc.) are
still available.
ON: all electrical devices are
available. This state can be entered by
pushing the ignition button once,
without pressing the brake pedal.
AVV: engine starting. This state can
be entered by pushing the ignition
button once while pressing the brake
pedal.
04016S0005EM
Battery Location
04026S0001EM
Keyless Ignition START/STOP
Button
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note:
With the keyless ignition in the ON
position: if 30 minutes pass with the
gear selector in P (Park) and the
engine stopped, the keyless ignition
will automatically reset to the STOP
position.
With the engine started, it is
possible to remove the key fob from
the vehicle. The engine will remain
running and the instrument cluster will
indicate the absence of the key fob
when the door is closed.
For more information on the engine
start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine"
in "Starting And Operating."
Warning!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully
disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake engaged, or repeated use of the
parking brake to slow the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake
system.
Caution!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Starting With A
Discharged Key Fob
Battery
If the key fob battery is discharged,
proceed as follows to start the vehicle:
1. Lift the front armrest.
2. Lay the key fob on the key fob
outline found on the floor of the armrest
compartment while pushing the
START/STOP button to start the
ignition.
04026S0002EM
Key Fob Placement Location
17
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
ENGINE
IMMOBILIZER
Engine Immobilizer
Operation
The Engine Immobilizer system
prevents unauthorized use of the
vehicle by disabling engine starting.
The system does not need to be
enabled or activated. Operation of the
immobilizer is automatic whether the
vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.
When the ignition is set to ON, the
Engine Immobilizer system identifies the
code transmitted by the key. If the code
is recognized as valid, the Engine
Immobilizer system enables engine
starting.
When the ignition is brought back to
STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system
deactivates the control unit controlling
the engine, disabling engine starting.
For the correct engine starting
procedures, refer to “Starting The
Engine” in “Starting And Operating.”
Irregular Operation
If the key code is not correctly
recognized during starting, the Engine
Immobilizer Failure/Break-in Attempt
icon is displayed on the instrument
panel (refer to "Warning Lights And
Messages" in "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel"). This condition leads
to the engine turning off after two
seconds. In this case, switch the
ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is
still blocked, try with the other keys
provided. If it is still not possible to start
the engine, contact an authorized
dealer.
If the Engine Immobilizer
Failure/Break-in Attempt
icon is
displayed while driving, this means that
the system is running a self-diagnosis
(e.g. due to a voltage drop). If the
display persists, contact an authorized
dealer.
Note:
Do not tamper with the Engine
Immobilizer system. Any modifications
or alterations could cause the
protection function to be deactivated.
The Engine Immobilizer system is
not compatible with certain aftermarket
remote starting systems. The use of
these devices could cause problems
when starting, as well as the
deactivation of the protection function.
All keys provided with the vehicle
have been programmed in accordance
with the electronics on the vehicle
itself.
Each key has its own code which
must be stored by the system's control
unit. Contact an authorized dealer to
have new keys (up to eight) stored with
a code.
18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECURITY ALARM
SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Alarm Activation
While armed, the alarm will sound in the
following scenarios:
Opening of doors/hood/deck lid
(perimeter protection)
Operation of ignition with a key which
is not validated
Cutting of the battery cables
Movement inside the passenger
compartment (volumetric protection —
if equipped)
Unexpected lifting/tilting of the
vehicle (anti-lift protection — if
equipped)
Activation of the alarm triggers the
acoustic warning and the turn signals.
Note: The alarm system is activated by
the Engine Immobilizer system, which is
automatically activated when you get
out of the vehicle with the key fob and
lock the doors.
To Arm The Alarm
With the doors, hood, and trunk lid
closed and the keyless ignition system
placed in the STOP position, push and
release the lock button on the key fob.
The alarm can also be armed by
pushing the Passive Entry door handle
button, located on the door external
handle. For further information, refer to
"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”
When the alarm is armed, the war ning
lights on the panels of the interior front
door handles will flash.
The activation of the alarm is preceded
by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is
detected, the system emits a further
acoustic signal.
If a second acoustic signal is emitted
after the alarm is already armed, wait
about four seconds and disarm the
alarm by pushing the unlock button.
Verify that the doors, hood, and trunk
lid are closed correctly and then rearm
the system by pushing the lock button
on the key fob.
If the alarm emits an acoustic signal
even when the doors, hood, and trunk
lid are correctly closed, a fault has
occurred in system operation. In this
case, contact an authorized dealer.
To Disarm The Alarm
Push the unlock button to disarm the
alarm. While disarming, the following
operations are performed:
Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if
programmed)
Two brief acoustic signals (if
programmed)
Doors are unlocked
The alarm can also be disarmed using
the Passive Entry System, by grasping
one of the Passive Entry front door
handles with a valid key fob in hand to
unlock. For further information refer to
"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04046S0001EM
Lock/Unlock Buttons
19
Note: The alarm does not disarm when
the doors are unlocked by inserting the
blade of the emergency key, found
inside the key fob, into the door handle
lock cylinder.
Volumetric/Anti-Lift
Protection — If Equipped
To ensure the correct operation of the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,
completely close the side windows.
To disable the function, push the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button
before activating the alarm.
When the function is disabled, this is
indicated by the light on the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button
flashing for several seconds.
Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift
Protection must be repeated each time
the instrument panel is switched off.
To Disarm The Alarm
Using Passive Entry
To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.
during a long period of vehicle
inactivity), insert the blade of the
emergency key, found inside the key
fob, into the door handle lock cylinder
and turn the emergency key to the right
(clockwise) to lock the door(s).
DOORS
Locking And Unlocking
Doors From The Inside
If all doors are closed properly, they will
automatically lock once the vehicle has
exceeded approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function
active).
Push the interior lock button on the
driver or passenger side door panel trim
to lock the doors.
With doors locked, push the unlock
button on the interior trim panel to
unlock the doors.
Note: Thekeyfobmaynotbefoundif
it is located next to a mobile phone, lap
top or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04046S0002EM
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection
Button
04056S0001EM
Door Lock And Unlock Switch
Panel
20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Warning!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Caution!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Locking/Unlocking
Doors From The Outside
When locking the doors from the
outside with the doors closed, push the
lock button on the key fob.
The door lock can be activated with all
doors locked and the trunk lid open.
When the lock button on the key fob is
pushed, all locks are activated,
including the open trunk lid. The trunk
lid will be locked when it is closed.
When unlocking the doors from the
outside, push the unlock button on the
key fob.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From The
Outside In An Emergency
If the battery is discharged or the key
fob is inoperable, you can lock or
unlock the doors from the outside by
inserting the blade of the emergency
key, found inside the key fob, into the
door handle lock cylinder and turn the
emergency key as follows.
Lock — Turn the emergency key to
the right (clockwise)
Unlock — Turn the emergency key to
the left (counter clockwise)
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system can identify
the presence of a key fob near the
doors and trunk lid.
The system enables the doors and
trunk lid to be locked or unlocked
without pushing any button on the key
fob.
The key fob is detected only after the
system recognizes the presence of a
hand on one of the front door handles.
If the detected key fob is valid, the
doors and the trunk lid are unlocked
(refer to the Information and
Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).
Note: The key fob may not be able to
be detected by the vehicle keyless-go
system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the keyless-go system from starting the
vehicle.
Grasping the handle of the driver's door
unlocks the driver's side door, or all
doors depending on the mode set
using the Information and Entertainment
System (refer to the Information and
Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).
21
Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has
rained and the door handle is wet, the
activation sensitivity of the Passive
Entry function may be reduced,
resulting in a longer reaction time.
Door Locking
To lock the doors, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure that you have the key fob
and are close to the driver’s or
passenger’s side door handle.
2. Push the Passive Entry door handle
button or the Passive Entry trunk lid
button, which is located next to the
external trunk lid release button. This
will lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door
locking will activate the alarm as well.
Note: After pushing the Passive Entry
door handle button, you must wait two
seconds before the doors can be
unlocked again using the passive entry
door handle button. This feature makes
it possible to check whether the vehicle
has been locked correctly by pulling the
door handle within two seconds. The
doors will not be unlocked again.
The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be
locked by pushing the lock button on
the key fob or on the interior door lock.
Driver Side Door Emergency
Opening
If the key fob does not work, e.g.
because its battery is discharged or the
vehicle battery is discharged, the
emergency key can be used to unlock
the driver side door.
To remove the emergency key from the
key fob, proceed as follows:
1. Push the sides of the key fob inward
and extract the cover pulling
downwards.
2. Remove the emergency key from
the key fob housing.
3. Insert the emergency key in the
driver side door lock cylinder and tur n it
to the left (counter clockwise) to unlock
the door.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04056S0006EM
Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button
04016S0002EM
Emergency Key Release Buttons
04016S0003EM
Emergency Key
22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note:
The emergency key blade is not
directional and can be inserted
indifferently into the lock.
To avoid leaving the key fob inside
the vehicle accidentally, the Passive
Entry function features an automatic
door unlocking function.
If one of the vehicle doors is open
and the "door locking" button on the
front door handles or lock button in the
interior door lock switch panel is
pushed, a check of the inside and
outside of the vehicle for the presence
of the key fob is made once all the
open doors are closed.
While pulling the handle, do not push the
door lock/unlock button on the handle.
If the key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry function
automatically unlocks all the vehicle
doors and flashes the turn signals.
If one or more key fobs are inside the
passenger compartment, the lock button
on the key fob inside the passenger
compartment is temporarily disabled.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors if
an unauthorized key fob has been
detected close to the outside of the
vehicle.
If the Passive Entry function is disabled
using the Information and Entertainment
System, the protections to avoid
accidentally leaving the key fob inside
the vehicle are deactivated.
Trunk Lid Access
Approaching the trunk lid with a valid
key fob, push the opening button to
access the trunk lid.
Note:
If the key fob is inadvertently
forgotten inside of the trunk, and an
attempt is made to close it from
outside, the trunk lid will not lock. With
the doors locked, the trunk lid
unlocked, and the key fob detected
inside the vehicle, the trunk lid will
unlock again and the lights flash twice.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04056S0001EM
Interior Lock Switch Panel
04056S0004EM
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle
When Locking
04056S0005EM
External Trunk Lid Release Button
23
Before driving, make sure the trunk
lid is closed correctly.
Trunk Lid Lock
The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be
locked by pushing the lock button on
the key fob, pushing the door lock
button on the door handles, or pushing
the lock button on the interior door
panel of the vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with Passive
Entry, the trunk lid and the doors can
be locked by pushing the button
located near the opening button of the
trunk lid.
System Activation/Deactivation
The Passive entry system can be
activated or deactivated using the
Information and Entertainment System.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all radio frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Power Lock — If
Equipped
The Power Lock is a safety device that
prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking and
unlocking buttons. The Power Lock
also prevent opening of the doors from
inside the passenger compartment.
It is recommended to lock the vehicle
doors each time the vehicle is parked.
Activating The Power Lock
The Power Lock is enabled on all the
doors by quickly pushing the lock
button on the key fob twice.
The turn signals will flash to let you
know that the Power Lock is active.
If one or more of the doors are not
closed correctly, the Power Lock will
not activate, preventing a person from
getting stuck inside the passenger
compartment by entering the vehicle,
and then closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Power Lock
The Power Lock disengages
automatically:
When the doors are unlocked,
pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
When the keyless ignition is placed in
the ON position.
04056S0006EM
Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button
24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child Safety Locks
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear
doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
This device can be engaged only with
the doors open.
Lock position: device locked (door
opened from exterior only)
Unlock position: device unlocked
(door may be opened from the inside)
The Child Safety Locks remain locked
even if the doors are unlocked.
Note: The rear doors cannot be
opened from the inside when the Child
Safety Lock is engaged.
Unlocking The Doors
With A Discharged
Battery
Proceed as follows to unlock the doors
if the vehicle battery is discharged.
Rear Doors And Passenger Door
1. With the doors unlocked insert the
emergency key from the key fob or a
flat bladed screwdriver into the door
lock manual release lock cylinder.
2. Turn the manual release lock
cylinder clockwise for the right door
locks or counterclockwise for the left
door locks.
3. Remove the key/screwdriver from
the manual release lock.
Proceed as follows to realign the door
lock device (only when the battery
charge has been restored):
Push the lock button on the
electronic key
Push the unlock button on the door
panel
Unlock driver’s door lock with the
emergency key
Operate the internal door handle
Note: For the rear doors, if the Child
Safety Locks are engaged, and the
previously described locking procedure
is carried out, operating the internal
handle will not open the door. Instead, it
will only realign the lock release device.
To open the door, the outside handle
must be used. The door central
locking/unlocking buttons are not
deactivated when the emergency lock
is engaged.
04056S0007EM
Child Safety Lock Positions
04056S0008EM
Door Lock Manual Release Lock
Cylinder
25
SEATS
The front seats can be adjusted to
ensure maximum comfort for the
occupants. When adjusting the driver’s
seat, keep the shoulders resting firmly
against the backrest, and the wrists
within reach of the top of the steering
wheel. The driver must also be able to
fully press the brake pedal.
Warning!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Front Seats
The front seats can be adjusted to
ensure maximum comfort for the
occupants. When adjusting the driver’s
seat, keep the shoulders resting firmly
against the backrest, and the wrists
within reach of the top of the steering
wheel. The driver must also be able to
fully press the brake pedal.
Warning!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Sparco Racing Seats —
If Equipped
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment lever is at the front of
the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar
upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat
is in the position desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment
Push the height adjustment button
upwards or downwards to obtain your
desired height.
Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the recline
lever located on the outboard side of
the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
04066S0002EM
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Adjustment Lever
2 — Height Adjustment Button
3 — Recline Lever
26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If
Equipped
On models equipped with power seats,
the switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use this
switch to move the driver's seat up,
down, forward, and rearward, or to
recline the seatback.
Caution!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may
cause damage to the seat controls. Seat
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Push the seat switch forward or
rearward to adjust to your desired
position.
Seatback Recline
The angle of the seatback can be
adjusted forward or rearward. Push the
seatback switch forward or rearward,
and the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped
with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side
of the power seat. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the
switch upward or downward to raise or
lower the lumbar support.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push
downward on the seat switch, and the
seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting)
The seat angle can be adjusted in four
directions. Lift or push the front part of
seat switch to move the front part of the
seat in the corresponding direction.
Release the seat switch when the seat
has reached the desired position.
Power Bolster Adjustment
Push the power bolster adjustment
buttons to regulate the width of the
backrest through the lateral padding.
04066S0003EM
Power Seat Adjustment
1 — Seat Switch (For/Rear/Height
Adjustment)
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Adjustment
04066S0015EM
Seatback Width Adjustment
4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons
5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons
27
Driver Memory Seat
The driver memory seat buttons can
store and recall three different driver’s
seat positions as well as outside power
mirror positions. Storing and recalling is
possible with the ignition in the ON or
STOP positions and the driver’s side
door closed, or for three minutes after
having opened the driver's side door.
The performed position memory is
confirmed by a beep. To set a memory
profile, first adjust your seat (and power
mirror position if desired) with the
various controls until you are in the
desired position. Then, push the
specific button you want to assign the
set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a
new seat position is memorized, the
previously memorized position on the
same button is automatically
overwritten. Recalling a memorized
position is also possible for
approximately three minutes after the
doors are opened and approximately
one minute after the engine is stopped.
To recall a memorized position, push
the relevant button briefly.
Warning!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before
fastening the seat belts and while the
vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined
so that the shoulder belt is no longer
resting against your chest. In a collision you
could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
Heated Seats
With the engine in the ON position,
push the driver or passenger heated
seat button
located on the
instrument panel.
You can select three heating levels:
Minimum — one orange indicator
illuminated on the buttons
Average — two orange indicator
illuminated on the buttons
Maximum — three orange indicator
illuminated on the buttons
After selecting a heating level, heat will
be felt within a few minutes.
A quick push of the heated seat button
will select the heat levels in order of
lowest to highest. Or, holding the switch
down from either “off” or the minimum
level for 1–2 seconds will automatically
select the maximum heat level.
When the heated seat function is not
active, pushing and holding the desired
heated seat button for 1–2 seconds will
activate the “fast maximum heating”
function. The heater produces a
boosted heat level for the first few
minutes of operation. After this, the
heat automatically lowers to reach the
normal temperature level for the
“maximum” setting.
The “minimum” setting is automatically
deactivated once a certain period of
time has elapsed. This varies on a
case-by-case basis, in accordance with
the specific operating conditions.
To lower the heat level, each quick push
of the switch will decrease by one level
until it is off. Holding the switch down at
any of the three levels for 1-2 seconds
will deactivate the heated seat.
Note: To preserve the battery charge,
this function cannot be activated when
the engine is off.
04066S0004EM
Heated Seat Buttons
28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Warning!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or
other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Seats
The rear seats allow for three
passengers.
Note: Because the rear seat is
designed as a 4+1 seat, the middle
seat is of limited use. It is
recommended that this seat only be
used by a person who can use the
backrest as a substitute for the head
restraint.
The seats and the seatbelts are
considered as components of the
protection system for the vehicle's
occupants.
Note: Refer to the "Seatbelts" in
"Safety" for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce
the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so
that the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
Warning!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the
Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of
a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
04066S0006EM
Rear Seat
29
Racing Seat Head
Restraints
Your vehicle may be equipped with
non-adjustable head restraints on the
driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the
seatbacks and are intended to help
protect you and the passenger from
neck injury.
Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,
on-road positions so that the head
restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
Front Head Restraints
(Adjustments) — If
Equipped
The front head restraints may be
height-adjustable. To adjust them,
operate as follows:
Upward adjustment: Raise the head
restraint until it clicks into place.
Downward adjustment: Push button
and lower the head restraint.
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are
placed in their proper positions in order to
minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be
adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
Note: To allow maximum visibility for
the driver, if the head restraints are not
used, lower the head restraints to the
fully down position.
Rear Head Restraints
(Adjustments)
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are
placed in their proper positions in order to
minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be
adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
The height of the outboard head
restraints can be adjusted. The head
restraint of the center seat, if equipped,
cannot be adjusted, only removed.
For upward adjustment, pull up on the
head restraint until it clicks into place.
For downward adjustment, push in the
adjustment button and lower the head
restraint while holding the button to the
desired height.
04076S0002EM
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note: To allow maximum visibility for
the driver, if the head restraints are not
in use, lower the head restraints to the
fully down position.
Head Restraints
(Removal)
To remove the head restraints, proceed
as follows:
1. Raise the head restraints to their
maximum height.
2. Push the adjustment button and the
release button at the side of the two
supports.
3. Remove the head restraints by
pulling them upwards.
To reinstall the head restraints, proceed
as follows:
1. Hold down both the adjustment
button and release button while placing
the head restraint post into the holes.
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to
the appropriate height for the
passengers.
Warning!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Adjustments
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also
allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping
lever is located below the steering wheel
at the end of the steering column.
04086S0001EM
Steering Wheel Adjustment
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
A — Open
B — Closed
31
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or
death.
To Adjust The Position:
1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control
Handle down to the open position.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. Lock the desired position by
pushing the Tilt/Telescoping Control
Handle to the closed position.
Warning!
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any
after-market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications
(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that
could adversely affect performance,
invalidate the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, cause SERIOUS SAFETY
PROBLEMS and also result in the vehicle
not meeting type-approval requirements.
Heated Steering Wheel
— If Equipped
With the ignition in the ON position,
push the heated steering wheel
button on the instrument panel.
When the function is enabled, the
indicator on the button will illuminate.
Note: If this function is activated with
the engine stopped, the battery may
run down.
Warning!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or
other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater.
It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
04086S0002EM
Heated Steering Wheel Button
32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Electrochromic Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for
headlight glare from vehicles behind
you.
The electrochromic mirror has a power
button to activate/deactivate the
automatic dimming/anti-glaring
function.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
automatic dimming feature is
deactivated.
Outside Power Mirrors
Power Adjustment
The power mirrors can only be adjusted
with the ignition ON.
Select the desired mirror using the
power mirror control.
To adjust the selected mirror, push the
knob in the direction desired.
Note: Once adjustment is complete,
rotate the knob to the neutral position
to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding
With the power mirror control knob in
the neutral position, move it to the
power folding position. Move the knob
again to return the mirrors to the driving
position.
If the power mirror control knob is
moved again during door mirror folding
(from closed to open position and vice
versa), the movement direction is
reversed.
Automatic Activation
Activating the central door locking
system from outside the vehicle
automatically folds the mirrors. The
mirrors return to the driving position
when the ignition is cycled to the ON
position.
If the door mirrors were folded using the
power mirror control knob, they can
only be returned to the driving position
by rotating the knob again.
Note: The power folding operation can
be enabled only when the vehicle
speed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h),
they can only be manually controlled up
to that speed.
04106S0002EM
Electrochromic Mirror Power
Button
04106S0004EM
Power Mirror Control
1 — Power Mirror Control Knob
A — Left
B — Right
C — Power Folding Position
D — Neutral
33
Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
Like the electrochromic mirror, an
automatic dimming feature is also
available on the outside rear view
mirrors to prevent glare. The automatic
dimming button is the same for all rear
view mirrors.
Warning!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an
outside convex mirror will look smaller and
farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on side convex mirrors could
cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in a side convex mirror.
Heated Mirrors
Push the rear defrost button in the
climate controls to activate the heated
mirrors.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located to the
left of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel. This switch controls
the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and rear fog lights.
In addition, there are buttons for
parking sensors deactivation and
stop/start. Refer to “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
The exterior lights can be activated only
when the ignition is in the ON position,
except for the parking lights. Refer to
"Parking Lights" in this section for more
information.
The instrument panel and the various
controls on the dashboard will be
illuminated when the exterior lights are
turned on.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the
headlights on or off according to
ambient light levels.
Function Activation
From the O (OFF) position, turn the light
switch to the
(AUTO) position
Note: The function can only be
activated with the ignition position
cycled to ON.
Function Deactivation
To deactivate the function, turn the light
switch to a position other than the
(AUTO) position.
Daytime Running Lights
(DRL)
With the ignition in the ON mode and
the light switch turned to the
position, if the dusk sensor detects
sufficient external light, the Daytime
Running Lights will turn on
automatically while the other lights
remain off.
04126S0001NA
Headlight Switch
1—
Parking Sensors Deactivation Button
2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running
Lights, Headlight Switch
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Rear Fog Light Button
5 — Stop/Start Button
34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the turn signals are operated, the
brightness of the corresponding
Daytime Running Lights will be
decreased as long as the turn signals
are on.
Non-Canadian Markets
If equipped, the DRL can be
activated/deactivated from the
Information and Entertainment System,
by selecting the following functions in
sequence on the main MENU:
"Settings", "Lights" and "Daytime
Lights".
Rear Fog Light
The rear fog light switch is integrated
with the headlight switch.
Push the
button to turn the rear fog
lights on/off.
The rear fog lights turn on only when
the headlights or parking lights are
turned on. The lights can be turned off
by pushing the
button again or by
turning the headlight switch to the O
(off) position.
When the engine is stopped with the
rear fog lights on, they will remain off
the next time the engine is started.
Parking Lights
With the ignition in the STOP position,
turn the headlight switch to the
position to turn the parking lights on.
All of the parking lights will tur n on for
eight minutes, and opening the door
activates an audible warning.
To leave only the lights on one side
(right/left) illuminated, you must move
the multifunction lever (located on the
left side of the steering wheel) to the
side that you want to remain on. With
the parking lights on, the
warning
light on the instrument panel will come
on.
Note: Placing the ignition to ON turns
off the parking lights, which were only
illuminated on one side.
Headlight Off Delay
The “Headlight Off Delay” function
delays the switching off of the
headlights after the vehicle has been
stopped.
The function can be activated from the
Information and Entertainment System
by selecting the following functions in
sequence on the main menu:
“Settings”, “Lights” and “Headlight Off
Delay”.
The side lights and the headlights stay
on for a time that can be set between
30, 60, and 90 seconds.
Function Activation
With the headlights on, place the
ignition to the STOP position and the
timer will then start.
Note: To activate this function, the
headlights must be deactivated within
two minutes after the ignition has been
cycled to the STOP position.
Function Deactivation
This function is deactivated by turning
on the headlights, the side lights, or by
cycling the ignition to ON.
High Beam Headlights
To activate the fixed high beam
headlights, push the turn multifunction
lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, towards the instrument
panel. The headlight switch must be
turned to the
(AUTO) or (ON)
position.
With high beam headlights on, the
High Beam Indicator on the
instrument panel will illuminate.
The high beam headlights are turned off
by pulling the lever to its original
position. The warning light/icon
will
turn off in the instrument panel when
the headlights are turned off.
04126S0020EM
Multifunction Lever
35
Flashing The Headlights
Pulling the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel will activate the high
beam headlights manually. The lights
will remain on as long as the lever is
held. Once the lever is released, the
lights will resume the previous position.
Automatic High Beam Headlights —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlights
system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high
beam control through the use of a
digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
This function is enabled with the
Information and Entertainment System,
and can only be activated with the light
switch turned to
(AUTO).
If the high beam headlights are on, the
blue icon/warning light
will illuminate
in the instrument panel.
When the speed is higher than 37 mph
(60 km/h) and the function is active, the
lights will turn off if the multifunction
lever is pushed again.
When the speed is lower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the function is active, the
function switches the high beam
headlights off.
If the high beam headlights are
operated quickly again (pushing the
multifunction lever towards the
instrument panel), the warning light/icon
will illuminate in the instrument
panel, and the main beam headlights
will be turn on constantly until the
speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h).
When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is
exceeded again, the automatic
functioning is reactivated.
If the multifunction lever is pushed again
with the Automatic High Beam
Headlights activated, the Automatic
High Beam Headlights function
deactivates.
To deactivate the automatic headlight
function, rotate the headlight switch to
the
position.
Note: If the system recognizes heavy
traffic areas, the automatic functions
remain disabled independently of the
vehicle’s speed.
Turn Signals
To activate the turn signals function,
move the multifunction lever, located on
the left side of the steering wheel, up or
down until it reaches the detent. Moving
the lever upward flashes the right turn
signal and moving the lever downward
will flash the left turn signal.
The
or turn signal will blink on the
instrument panel.
The turn signals turn off automatically
when the vehicle is brought back onto a
straight course.
“Lane Change” Function
Tap the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the tur n
signal (right or left) will flash five times.
Then, the turn signal (right or left) will
automatically turn off.
To turn off the flashing before the end of
the cycle, move the lever in the
opposite direction until the first click
(about half way).
Static Bending Light
Function (SBL) — If
Equipped
The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs) in order to better
illuminate the street and increase the
light angle while turning. This function is
enabled by rotating the light switch to
position
or (AUTO). The SBL
LEDs activate when the speed is below
25 mph (40 km/h).
This function can be activated/
deactivated on the Information and
Entertainment System by selecting the
following functions in sequence on the
main menu: “Settings”, “Lights” and
“Cornering Lights”.
36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Map Reading
Lights
The front map/reading and overhead
lights are mounted in the overhead
console. Each light can be turned on by
pushing the corresponding switch on
the console. These switches are backlit
for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time.
Note: Before getting out of the vehicle,
ensure that the overhead lights are off.
This will prevent the battery level from
being drained once the doors are
closed. If a light is left on accidently, the
overhead lights turn off automatically
approximately 15 minutes after the
engine has been turned OFF.
Overhead Light Timing — If
Equipped
On certain models, to assist getting in
and out of the vehicle at night or in
poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have
been provided.
Timing While Getting Into The
Vehicle — The overhead lights turn on
according to the following modes:
Will illuminate for a few seconds
when the doors are unlocked.
Will illuminate for approximately three
minutes when one of the doors is
opened.
Will illuminate for a few seconds
when the doors are locked.
Timing is interrupted when the ignition
is cycled to ON.
Three Modes Are Provided For
Switching Off:
When all doors are closed after
entering the vehicle, the three-minute
timer will stop and a seconds timer will
start for the interior lights. This timing will
stop when the ignition is cycled to ON.
When doors are locked (either with
key fob or with key inserted on driver
side door), the overhead light turns off.
The interior lights will turn off after
15 minutes to preserve the battery.
Timing While Getting Out Of The
Vehicle — After cycling the ignition to
STOP, the overhead lights will turn on
as follows:
For a few seconds after the engine
stops.
For approximately three minutes
when one of the doors is opened.
For a few seconds when the last
door is closed.
The timing stops automatically when
the doors are locked.
Courtesy Lights — If Equipped
On the driver and passenger sun visor,
there is a light which illuminates the sun
visor mirror when folded down.
The courtesy light turns on
automatically by lifting the cover.
04136S0001EM
Overhead Console
1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch
2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch
3 — Overhead Lights Switch
4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch
5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light
Switch
6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light
7 — Center Reading/Map Light
8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light
04136S0002EM
Sun Visor Mirror
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
37
Glove Compartment
Light
This light turns on automatically when
the glove compartment is opened and
turns off when it is closed.
The light turns on and off regardless of
the ignition status.
Interior Ambient Lighting
The brightness of the interior passenger
compartment lights can be adjusted via
the Information and Entertainment
System.
To access the adjustment function, on
the main menu select the following
items in sequence:
1. "Settings"
2. "Interior Ambient Lighting"
3. "Lights"
The lights can be adjusted to seven
different levels of brightness.
Door Light
This vehicle is equipped with door
courtesy lamps that illuminate the entry
way for the driver or passenger when
the door is opened, and turns off when
it is closed.
The light turns on and off regardless of
the ignition status.
On vehicles equipped with a "Passive
Entry" system, another light can be
found under each exterior door handle.
Rear Overhead Light
The rear overhead light buttons are
activated or deactivated by two on/off
switches on the front map reading
lights.
04136S0003EM
Glove Compartment Light
04136S0007EM
Door Light
04136S0005EM
Exterior Door Handle Light
04136S0004EM
Rear Overhead Light
1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light
2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light
3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch
4 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light
Switch
38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The lights turns on when a door is
opened.
Note: The light will turn off
automatically after a few minutes if a
door is left open. To turn it on again,
open another door or close and reopen
the same door.
Luggage Compartment
Courtesy Lights
The luggage compartment features two
courtesy lights.
These courtesy lights turn on
automatically when the trunk is opened
and turn off when it is closed.
The courtesy lights will turn on and off
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch.
Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights
will automatically turn off after
15 minutes to preserve battery life.
Instrument Panel
Dimmer Control
With the daytime running lights or
headlights on, rotate the dimmer control
upward to increase the instrument
panel brightness and the control button
icons. Rotate the dimmer control
downward to decrease brightness.
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS
Windshield Wiper Stalk
The windshield wiper stalk is located on
the right side of the steering wheel.
The windshield wipers will only operate
with the ignition cycled to ON.
Caution!
Turn the windshield wipers off when
driving through an automatic car wash.
Damage to the windshield wipers may
result if the wiper control is left in any
position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the
wiper switch and allow the wipers to return
to the “Park” position before turning off the
engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the
wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the
windshield wiper control is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
04136S0006EM
Luggage Compartment Courtesy
Lights
04126S0055EM
Dimmer Control
39
Windshield Wiper/
Washers
Operation: The switch on the wiper
stalk can be set to the following
positions:
Windshield Wiper Off.
Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.
High Sensitivity Rain Sensing.
Low Continuous Wiper Speed.
High Continuous Wiper Speed.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotating the switch to the
position
activates the first (low) level continuous
speed of the windshield wipers in
manual mode.
Rotating the switch to the
position
activates the second (high) level
continuous speed of the windshield
wipers in manual mode.
Rain Sensors
Rotating the switch to the
position,
activates the first, less sensitive level of
the Rain Sensing function.
Rotating the switch to the
position,
activates the second, more sensitive
level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer
to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more
information on how this system
functions.
Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel
to operate the windshield washer.
Keep the stalk pulled to activate both
the windshield washer jet and the
windshield wiper with a single
movement. The wipers and washers will
continue to operate until you let go of
the stalk.
The windshield wiper stops working
three strokes after the stalk is released,
followed by a final stroke six seconds
later to complete the cycle.
Mist
Use this feature when weather
conditions make occasional usage of
the wipers necessary. Push the stalk
upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle. This
function is useful to remove small
deposits of dust from the windshield or
morning dew.
Note: This function does not activate
the windshield washer. To spray
windshield washer fluid onto the
windshield, the washing function must
be used.
Warning!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You
might not see other vehicles or other
obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the
windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
04146S0001EM
Windshield Wiper Switch
40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensor
The Rain Sensor is located behind the
interior rear view mirror. This feature
senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for
the driver.
The feature is especially useful for road
splash or over spray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle
ahead. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four
settings to activate this feature.
The sensor has an adjustment range
that varies progressively from wiper still
(no stroke) when the windshield is dry,
to wiper at continuous speed (fast
operation) with intense rain.
Activation
Rotating the wiper switch to position
or activates the rain sensor.
The activation of the rain sensor system
is done by tapping the wiper stalk
upwards while the switch is in the
or
position.
The variation in sensitivity during rain
sensor operation is also signaled by a
stroke of the wiper (command acquired
and implemented). This stroke is also
executed with the windshield dry.
If the windshield washer is used with
the rain sensor activated, the normal
washing cycle is performed, after which
the rain sensor resumes its normal
automatic operation.
Note: Keep the glass in the sensor
area clean.
Deactivation
Use the wiper switch or cycle the
ignition to STOP.
If the ignition is cycled to the STOP
position and the wiper switch is left in
or position, no wiping cycle will
occur even if it rains when the vehicle is
next started (ignition at ON).
This prevents accidental activation of
the rain sensor when the engine is
started (e.g. when the windshield is
being washed by hand or the wipers
are stuck to the windshield by ice).
You can restore the automatic
functioning of the rain sensor by
tapping the wiper stalk upwards once
the vehicle has been restarted.
When the rain sensor is reactivated
using any of the functions described
above, reactivation is indicated by a
single tap of the windshield wipers,
regardless of the condition of the
windshield.
In the event of malfunction of the rain
sensor while it is active, the windshield
wiper operates intermittently at a speed
consistent with the sensitivity setting of
the rain sensor, whether or not there is
rain on the glass for as long as the
sensor failure is indicated on the
display.
The sensor continues to operate and it
is possible to set the windshield wiper
to continuous mode
or .The
failure indication remains on for as long
as the sensor is active.
The rain sensor is able to recognize and
automatically adjust itself in the
presence of the following conditions:
Presence of dirt on the controlled
surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.).
Presence of streaks of water caused
by the worn window wiper blades.
Difference between day and night.
04146S0002EM
Rain Sensor
41
CLIMATE CONTROL
Passenger
Compartment Air Vents
Side Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Side Air
Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster
(2) in any direction.
Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2)
to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side
Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
will open the vent.
Central Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Central
Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent
Adjuster (2) up or down.
Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow
Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow.
Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow
Adjuster (3) up will open the vents,
allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating
it down will close the vents.
Rear Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Rear Air
Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster
(2) in any direction.
Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2)
to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear
Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
will open the vent.
04156S0002EM
Side Air Vents
1 — Demister Air Vents
2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster
04156S0003EM
Central Air Vents
1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents
2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster
3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster
4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent
04156S0004EM
Rear Air Vents
1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents
2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster
42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System
Controls
04156S0005EM
Automatic Climate Control System
1. Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 6. Rear Defrost Button 11. Passenger Heated Seat Button — If
Equipped
2. Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic
Operation)
7. Passenger Side Air Distribution Selec-
tion Button
12. Air Conditioning On/Off Button
3. Driver Side Air Distribution Selection
Button
8. Passenger Side AUTO Button (Auto-
matic Operation)
13. Steering Wheel Heater Button — If
Equipped
4. Front Defrost Button (Rapid Defrosting) 9. Passenger Temperature Adjustment
Knob
14. Driver Side Heated Seat Button — If
Equipped
5. Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10. SYNC Button – Sets Temperature
Alignment Between Driver & Passenger
Side
15. Air Recirculation Button
43
Caution!
The system uses R1234yf refrigerant,
which does not pollute the environment in
the event of accidental leakage. Under no
circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids,
which are incompatible with the
components of this system.
Description
The Automatic Dual Zone Climate
Control System adjusts the temperature
and air distribution independently
between the driver and passenger.
The system maintains the set
temperature inside the passenger
compartment and compensates for
outside temperature change.
Note: The reference temperature is
72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort
management.
The automatic setting will adjust the
following to maintain comfort within the
passenger compartment:
Air temperature from the driver/front
passenger side vents
Air distribution from the driver/front
passenger side vents
Fan speed (continuous variation of
the air flow)
Compressor variations (for
cooling/dehumidifying the air)
Air recirculation
The Climate Control System can also
be operated manually by using the
buttons and knobs on the faceplate.
Manual selections will override the
automatic settings, which are stored
until the AUTO button is pushed. If the
system intervenes for safety reasons,
the automatic setting will take control of
the system.
The below operations will not
deactivate the automatic (AUTO)
function:
Air Recirculation activation/
deactivation
A/C activation/deactivation
SYNC function activation
Rear Window Defrost activation/
deactivation
When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
internal temperature is controlled
according to the set temperature.
The following can be manually set or
adjusted:
Driver/passenger air temperature
Blower speed (continuous variation)
Air distribution (seven positions for
driver and passenger)
A/C activation
Front Defroster
Air recirculation
Rear Defroster
System deactivation
Operating Mode
The Climate Control system can be
activated in different ways. It is
recommended to use the automatic
function. Push the AUTO button and
set the desired temperatures.
The automatic system adjusts the
temperature, quantity, and distribution
of air introduced into the passenger
compartment. It also controls air
recirculation and the activation of the air
conditioner.
At any time during automatic operation,
you can change the temperature,
activate or deactivate the Rear
Defroster, activate SYNC, activate or
deactivate the air conditioner, and
activate or deactivate air recirculation.
The system will automatically adjust to
the new settings.
44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Display
Settings
The Climate Control settings are visible
on the Information and Entertainment
System radio screen.
The display on the Information and
Entertainment System is a pop up
window (1), which is activated by
pushing the buttons or turning the
knobs on the Climate Control system.
The indicator lights located on the
number of buttons and knobs indicate
that the selected feature is on/off. If no
operation is performed for a
predetermined time, the pop-up will
close on the display.
Air Temperature
Adjustment
Rotate the driver or passenger
Temperature Adjustment Knob
clockwise for warmer temperatures or
counterclockwise for cooler
temperatures. The set temperatures are
shown on the Information and
Entertainment System.
Push the SYNC button to sync the
driver and passenger air temperatures.
Rotate the passenger Temperature
Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC
function. This will set a new passenger
side temperature.
Rotate the Temperature Adjustment
Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI
(maximum heating) setting or fully
counterclockwise to engage the LO
(maximum cooling) setting. To
deactivate these functions, rotate the
Temperature Adjustment Knob to the
desired temperature.
Rear passengers’ temperature is linked
to driver side selection.
Air Distribution
Selection
Push the Air Distribution Selection
button on the faceplate to change the
mode of air distribution.
Air flow to the windshield and
demister window vents to
demist/defrost them.
Air flow at the central and side
dashboard vents to ventilate the
chest and the face.
Air flow to the front and rear floor
vents. This setting heats the
passenger compartment the
quickest.
Air flow distributed between the
floor vents (hotter air) and the
central and side dashboard vents
(cooler air). This air distribution
setting is useful on sunny days
during spring and autumn.
Air flow distributed between the
floor vents, windshield, and front
side window defrosting/demisting
vents. This distribution setting
warms the passenger
compartment while preventing the
windows from fogging up.
Air flow distribution between the
windshield demisting/defrosting
vents, and side/central dashboard
vents. This distribution setting
sends air to the windshield in
sunny conditions.
Air flow distribution to all vents on
the vehicle.
In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls
automatically manage the air
distribution. When set manually, the
respective symbols on the Information
and Entertainment System indicate the
air distribution setting.
04156S0006EM
1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display
45
Fan Speed Adjustment
Turn the Blower Speed Knob to
increase or decrease the blower speed.
The speed is displayed with lighted
indicators in the Information and
Entertainment System display.
Maximum fan speed = all indicators
illuminated on the Information and
Entertainment System display
Minimum fan speed = one indicator
illuminated on the Information and
Entertainment System display
The fan can be turned off by rotating
the Blower Speed Knob
counterclockwise to position O (all
segments on the Information and
Entertainment System display are
turned off).
Note: To restore automatic control of
the fan speed, push the AUTO button.
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pushed
(indicator illuminated), the Climate
Control system automatically adjusts
the following settings:
Quantity and distribution of air flow in
the passenger compartment
The air conditioner
Air recirculation
Cancels any manual settings
Selecting the AUTO function illuminates
the indicator on the A/C button
.
If air distribution or the fan speed is
manual adjusted, the AUTO button
indicator will turn off to indicate that the
Climate Control system is no longer in
AUTO mode.
After a manual adjustment, push the
AUTO button to resume the automatic
system.
SYNC Button
Push the SYNC button (indicator
illuminated) to sync the passenger side
air temperature with the driver side air
temperature.
This function makes temperature
regulation easier when the driver is
traveling alone.
Turn the passenger Temperature
Adjustment Knob or push the
passenger side Air Distribution
Selection Button to change the
passenger side air temperature and
return to separate air temperature
management.
Air Recirculation And Air
Quality System (AQS)
Air Recirculation is managed according
to the following operating mode:
Automatic engagement: indicator is
illuminated above the “A” on the Air
Recirculation Button
Forced activation (air circulation
always activated): indicator illuminated
above the
iconontheAir
Recirculation Button
Forced deactivation (air recirculation
always off with intake of outside air):
both indicators not illuminated on the
Air Recirculation Button
The three operating conditions are
obtained by pushing the Air
Recirculation Button
in sequence.
Enabling The Air Quality System
(AQS) Function — If Equipped
When the automatic recirculation
function is selected, the AQS function
automatically activates internal air
recirculation when the outside air is
polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and
tunnels).
At low external temperatures or in high
humidity, the automatic function turns
off to avoid fogging up the windows.
The user can select the function again
by pushing the Air Recirculation Button.
In automatic operation, air recirculation
will be controlled by the system
according to outside environmental
conditions.
Note:
With the AQS function active and
after the internal air recirculation
system has been functioning for a set
amount of time, the Climate Control
System enables air intake to cycle the
air in the passenger compartment for a
set time. The AQS function is disabled
during the air changes.
46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The engagement of the recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the
required heating or cooling conditions
faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use
it on rainy/cold days as it can increase
the possibility of the windows fogging.
When the outside temperature is low,
recirculation is forced off to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
A/C Compressor
Push the A/C button to activate or
deactivate the A/C compressor
(indicator illuminated when activated).
The A/C compressor will remain off
even after the engine has stopped.
When the A/C compressor is turned off,
the system deactivates air recirculation
to prevent the windows from fogging
up. If the climate control system can
maintain the temperature, with the A/C
turned off, the AUTO feature will remain
on and the AUTO button indicator light
will not switch off.
To restore automatic control of the A/C
compressor, push the A/C button
or
the AUTO button. W ith the A/C
compressor off, the air speed can be
set manually using the Air Speed
Adjustment Knob.
When the A/C compressor is on, and
the engine is running, air speed cannot
be lower than the minimum speed (only
one indicator light is lit).
Note: WhentheA/CisofftheClimate
Control system can not produce air that
is colder than the current outside
temperature. Under certain
environmental conditions, windows
could fog up rapidly, since the air is not
dehumidified.
Front Defroster And
MAX-DEF Function
Push the Front Defroster button
(indicator illuminated) to defrost the
windshield and side windows.
While in MAX-DEF function, the air
conditioner will:
Activate the air conditioner
compressor when the weather allows
Turn air recirculation off
Set the maximum air temperature (HI)
on both the driver and passenger side
Activate a blower speed based on
the temperature of the engine coolant
Adjust the air flow towards the
windshield and front side windows
Activate the Rear Window Defroster
Display the fan speed (indicators
illuminated) and current air distribution
setting
Note: The MAX-DEF function remains
active for approximately three minutes
once the engine coolant reaches the
proper temperature.
When the function is on, AUTO mode
will deactivate. The only manual
operations possible are adjusting
blower speed and turning off the Rear
Window Defroster.
Pushing the
button switches off the
MAX-DEF function.
Rear Defroster
Push the Rear Defroster button to
activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear
Defroster.
The Rear Defroster will turn off after
20 minutes or once the engine is turned
off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push
the Rear Defroster
button.
Note: To avoid damage, do not apply
stickers over the interior heating
filaments of the Rear Defroster.
Humidity Sensor
The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent
the windows from fogging up. The
AUTO function (indicator illuminated)
must be on for the Humidity Sensor to
function.
When outside temperature is low, the
system may turn the compressor on
and turn air recirculation off for safer
driving.
47
Switching Off/On The
Climate Control System
Switching Off The Climate Control
System
Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob
completely counterclockwise to turn off
the Climate Control System.
With the air conditioner off:
Air recirculation is on
The A/C compressor is off
Thefanisoff
The heated rear window can be
activated/deactivated
Note: The climate control system
stores the previously set temperatures
and resumes operation when any
button on the system is pushed.
Switching On The Climate Control
System
To switch the climate control system on
in automatic mode, push the AUTO
button.
Stop/Start
The climate control system manages
the Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has
the engine shut off when vehicle speed
is 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort
within the vehicle.
Stop/Start will deactivate in the
following scenarios:
The climate control system is in
AUTO mode (indicator illuminated), and
the vehicle has yet to reach the set
temperature
The climate control system is in LO
maximum cooling
The climate control system is in HI
maximum heating
The climate control system is in the
MAX-DEF status
When the Stop/Start system is active,
the engine will restart if the inside
temperature changes significantly, or if
the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is
activated.
With Stop/Start system on, air flow is
reduced to keep the compartment
comfort conditions for longer.
Until the temperature drastically
changes within the cabin, the climate
control system will continue to maintain
the temperature while the engine is off.
By deactivating the Stop/Start system
with the
button located on the
dashboard, the climate control system
will take priority over the engine shutting
off.
Note:
In harsh climate conditions, limit the
use of the Stop/Start system to
prevent the compressor from
continuously switching on and off. This
will cause rapid misting of the windows
and the accumulation of humidity in
the passenger compartment.
When the Stop/Start system is on,
the climate control system will always
take air in from outside, reducing the
probability of the windows fogging up.
Additional Heater — If
Equipped
Note: The additional heater
automatically operates if the outside
temperature and engine coolant
temperature are low. The heater will not
operate if battery voltage is low.
System Maintenance
In winter, the Climate Control System
must be turned on at least once a
month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer before the summer.
48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window switches work with
the ignition in the ON position and for
three minutes after the ignition has
been placed in the STOP position.
When one of the front doors is opened,
this operation is disabled.
Driver Side Front Door Controls
The switches are located on the door
panel trim. All windows can be
controlled from the driver side door
panel.
Window Opening
Briefly push the window switch once to
move the window downward.
Push the switch a second time to
activate the automatic operation.
Pushing the switch a third time will stop
the window in the desired position.
Window Closing
Pull the window switch up to move the
window upward. Hold the switch for at
least half of a second and the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window during Auto-Up
operation, push or pull the window
switch again.
Passenger Side Front Door/Rear
Door Controls
There are single window controls on the
passenger and rear door trim panels
which operate the door windows.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
The vehicle may be equipped with an
anti-pinch safety device for closing the
windows.
If the safety system senses any
obstacle while the window is closing, it
will stop the window’s movement and
reverse it, depending on its position.
This device is also useful if the windows
are activated accidentally by children on
board the vehicle.
The anti-pinch safety function is
activated both during the manual and
the automatic operation of the window.
When the anti-pinch system is
activated, the window closing is
immediately interrupted. Then the
window closing is automatically
reversed and the window lowers by
about eight inches (20 cm) in relation to
the first stop position. The window
cannot be operated during this time.
Note: In the event of an error, or if the
anti-pinch protection is activated three
consecutive times, the automatic
closing operation of the window will be
deactivated. In order to restore the
correct operation of the system, the
window must be lowered.
Power Window System Initialization
If power supply is interrupted, the
electric window automatic operation
must be initialized once more.
The initialization procedure described
below must be carried out for each
door (with the doors closed):
1. Fully close the window to be
initialized, with manual operation.
2. After the window has been closed,
hold the up switch for at least three
seconds.
04166S0001EM
Power Window Switches
1 — Front Left
Window Switch
4 — Window
Lockout Switch
2 — Front Right
Window Switch
5 — Rear Left
Window Switch
3 — Rear Right
Window Switch
49
Warning!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob
in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the release lever located on the
driver’s side kick panel.
2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and
position yourself in front of the grille.
3. Lift the hood slightly.
4. Move the under-hood latch from
right to left to release the hood.
5. Raise the hood completely. The
operation is assisted by the addition of
two gas props which hold it in the open
position.
Note:
Do not tamper with the props and
assist the hood while lifting it.
Use both hands to lift the hood.
Before lifting, check that the windshield
wiper arms are not raised from the
windshield or in operation, that the
vehicle is stationary and that the
electric park brake is engaged.
04196S0001EM
Hood Release Lever
04196S0002EM
Lift Under Hood Latch Up Then Left
50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
As the hood is extremely light, to close
the hood, lower it to approximately
16 inches (40 cm) from the engine
compartment then apply a slight
pressure downward and drop the hood.
Make sure that the hood is completely
closed and fully latched. If it is not
perfectly closed, do not try to push the
hood down but open it and repeat the
procedure
Note: Always check that the hood is
closed correctly to prevent it from
opening while the vehicle is travelling.
Since the hood is equipped with a
double locking system, one for each
side, you must check that it is closed
on both its side ends.
Warning!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
TRUNK
The trunk unlocking is electrically
operated and is deactivated when the
vehicle is in motion.
Opening
Opening From The Outside
When unlocked, the trunk lid can be
opened from outside the vehicle using
the external trunk lid release button
located between the plate lights. Push
the button until you hear a “click.” The
trunk lid can also be opened by quickly
pushing the external trunk lid release
button on the key fob twice.
The turn signal indicators will blink and
the internal lights will turn on when the
trunk lid is opened. They turn off
automatically when the trunk lid is
closed.
The lights turn off automatically after a
few minutes if the trunk lid is left open.
Opening From The Inside
When unlocked, the trunk lid can be
opened from inside the vehicle using
the internal trunk lid release button,
located under the dashboard near the
engine hood opening lever. Push the
trunk lid release button until you hear a
“click.”
Trunk Lid Emergency Opening
A lever can be found in the trunk lid over
the lock to allow opening from the inside.
04056S0005EM
External Trunk Lid Release Button
04206S0002EM
Internal Trunk Lid Release Button
04206S0006EM
Emergency Release Button
51
Pull the lever in the direction indicated
by the arrow to open the trunk lid. The
lever can be seen in the dark.
Closing
Grip one of the handles and lower the
trunk lid until it clicks.
Note:
It will not be possible to open the
trunk lid with a key or by pushing the
button in the passenger compartment
when the battery is disconnected. So,
always position the manual trunk lid
opening strap on the trunk lid lock
before disconnecting the battery. Refer
to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the procedure.
Trunk Initialization
Note: If the battery is disconnected or
the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid
opening/closing mechanism must be
re-initialized as follows:
1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Push the lock button on the remote
control.
3. Push the unlock button on the
remote control.
Luggage Compartment
Specifications
Access To The Tire Service Kit
To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the
carpet in the luggage compartment. For
its use, refer to ”Tire Service Kit” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If
Equipped
There are four hooks inside the luggage
compartment for attaching the cargo
net or cables which can secure the
cargo be carried.
Note: Do not apply a load greater than
22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.
Cargo Net — If Equipped
This is useful for correctly arranging the
cargo and/or for transporting light
materials.
The cargo net is available from an
authorized dealer.
04206S0003EM
Trunk Lid Internal Handles
04206S0004EM
Cargo Area
04206S0005EM
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment
proceed as follows:
1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the
glove compartment by placing the
emergency key in the lock on the
handle.
2. Pull handle to open the glove
compartment.
When the glove compartment is
opened, a light turns on to illuminate
the inside of the compartment.
Note: Do not insert objects of such a
size that the compartment cannot be
completely closed. Always make sure
that the glove compartment is
completely closed when driving.
Sun Visors
The sun visors are located at the sides
of the interior rear view mirror. They can
be adjusted forward and sideways.
To direct the visor toward the
passenger side window, detach the
visor from the interior rear view mirror
sidehookandturnittowardstheside
window.
From this position, the sun visor can
also be extended toward to rear of the
vehicle for additional blockage of
sunlight.
Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on
the back of the sun visors and can be
used even in poor light conditions.
Note: A rear facing child restraint
system should never be fitted in the
front passenger seat. Always comply
with the instructions on the sun visor.
Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety"
for more information.
Homelink — If Equipped
Description
Homelink is a fixed system installed on
the vehicle. It can sync up to three
different devices that activate garage
doors, gates, lighting systems, and
home or office alarm systems.
Programming
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run
your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only
use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
Note: Without starting the engine,
activate the handbrake and place the
ignition in the ON position.
04246S0001EM
Opening The Glove Compartment
04246S0002EM
Rotate Sun Visor Toward
Passenger Window
53
The following operation will delete the
manufacture’s standard codes and
does not need to be repeated during
the subsequent button programming:
Push and hold the outer buttons
(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the
lighted indicators will start to flash.
Release both buttons.
Note: Follow the steps below to begin
programming your remote control to
one of the HomeLink buttons:
1. Push and hold the desired
HomeLink button (1, 2 or 3).
When the HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly, move the portable remote
control one to three inches from the
HomeLink system (keeping the
programmable button pushed down).
2. If the indicator does not begin to
flash quickly, change the distance
between the HomeLink and the
portable remote control and try the
procedure again.
3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first
slowly and then quickly. When the
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
both buttons.
Using The Homelink System
The HomeLink system activates the
garage door or gate motor, just like the
portable remote control. The car must
be within the range of the garage door
and the ignition must be in the ON
position.
Push the programmed button (1, 2 or
3). While the signal is being transmitted,
the indicator is lit and the system
(garage door, gate, etc.) will respond.
If the HomeLink system does not
operate, the original portable remote
control may be equipped with an
alternative code (refer to “Alternative
Code Synchronization”).
If necessary, the original remote control
can still be used to operate the system.
Alternative Code Synchronization
To check whether the garage door or
gate motor has an alternative code,
proceed as follows:
1. Read the garage door or gate motor
manufacturer manual.
2. The portable remote control seems
to have programmed to the HomeLink
system, but the garage door or gate
can be neither opened or closed.
3. Push the programmed button and
keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an
alternative code system, the indicator
flashes briefly, and then remains off for
two seconds. This sequence is
repeated for 20 seconds.
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run
your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only
use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
04246S0006NA
Garage Door Opener (Homelink)
Buttons
1 — Homelink Button 1
2 — Homelink Button 2
3 — Homelink Button 3
4 — Homelink Indicator
54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note: To program Homelink using an
Alternative Code, the car must be
within range of the garage door.
Activate the handbrake and turn the
ignition to ON, without starting the
engine.
Proceed as follows:
1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button
on the garage door or gate motor. The
color and position may vary depending
on the manufacturer (consult the
garage door or gate manual). Push the
“Learn” or “Train” button (this normally
activates the setting warning light).
2. Push the desired HomeLink button
(1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink
indicator begins to flash slowly, move
the portable remote control one to three
inches from the HomeLink system
(keeping the programmable button
pushed down).
3. Within 30 seconds, push the
programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release
it. Push the programmed button a
second time and release it to conclude
the operation. For some motors, the
operation will probably have to be
repeated a third time to end the setting.
The motor should now be capable of
recognizing the signal transmitted by
HomeLink and then open/close the
door or gate.
Programming A Single Key
It is possible to program another
original remote control on an already
programmed HomeLink key by
canceling the previously stored
frequency.
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run
your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only
use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
Note: Activate the handbrake and
place the ignition to ON without starting
the engine.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the desired HomeLink button
and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not
release the button until the last
operation has been performed.
2. When the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, move the
portable remote control 1 to 3 inches
from the system (keeping the
programmable button pressed down).
If the indicator does not begin to flash
quickly, change the distance between
the HomeLink and the portable remote
control and try the procedure again.
The HomeLink indicator flashes, first
slowly and then quickly. When the
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
both buttons on the remote control.
The system previously programmed to
HomeLink has now been deleted and
the new system is ready to use. This
does not affect the other two HomeLink
buttons in any way.
Deleting Programmed Keys
It is recommended to delete HomeLink
programming before selling the car.
All three keys are deleted
simultaneously.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push and hold the outer buttons
(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the
indicator will start to flash.
2. Release both keys.
55
Technical Information For After
Sales Service
If you are unable to set up HomeLink
successfully after following the above
instructions, contact After Sales Service
(HomeLink free hotline number
1-800-355-3515 ) with the following
information:
Vehicle make and model, including
manufacturing year and country of
purchase;
Make, model, age and frequency of
use of the original portable remote
control (if known).
Note: For US:
FCC ID: M3N-82135300
For Canada:
IC: 7812A-82135300
For Mexico:
RLVC-A213-0334
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Center Console
The center console storage
compartment is located between the
front seats.
To access the center console storage,
lift the upper part of the center console
as shown below.
Warning!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position.
Driving with the console compartment lid
open may result in injury in a collision.
Cupholder
Two cupholders are available in the
center console.
To access the cupholders, slide the
cover forward. To close the
compartment, push the cover and it will
close automatically.
Fire Extinguisher — If
Equipped
If equipped, there is a fire extinguisher
located in the cargo area.
04246S0004EM
Center Console
04246S0005EM
Cupholders In Center Console
1— Cover
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
The following systems are used for
reducing engine emissions:
Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensors
Evaporation Control System
ACTIVE
AERODYNAMICS
Front Mobile Spoiler
(Alfa Active Aero)
This is an automatic device, working at
the vehicle speed, which allows higher
reactivity at average speeds and higher
vehicle stability at high speeds,
regulating the air flow into the lower part
of the vehicle.
Note: The system is not active in
temperatures near or below zero, or
when the Alfa DNA Pro selector is in the
"Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency"
positions.
If there is a fault, a generic failure icon
will light up on the instrument panel
display, along with a message that will
identify the type of malfunction. See
your authorized dealer if a fault occurs.
04296S0001EM
Front Fascia
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section gives you all the
information you need to understand
and use
the instrument panel correctly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . .59
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY ..................61
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL....................66
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. .88
58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Cluster
1. Tachometer
2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature
Gauge With Overheating Warning Light
3. Instrument Cluster Display
4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The
Triangle On The Left Side Of The
Symbol Indicates The Side Of The
Vehicle With The Fuel Door)
5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)
05026S0006EM
Instrument Cluster
59
Tachometer
The Tachometer indicates the engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting
(Brightness Sensor)
Inside the Tachometer there is a light
sensor capable of detecting light and
adjusting the brightness of the
instrument panel and the Information
and Entertainment System display.
Engine Oil Temperature
Gauge
The digital indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine oil and starts
supplying indications when the oil
temperature reaches approximately
122° F (50°C).
Under normal usage, the temperature
should remain around the middle of the
digital scale according to the working
conditions.
The
warning light will turn on to
signal the excessive increase of the
engine oil temperature.
In the event of excessive engine oil
temperature, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized
dealer.
Fuel Level Gauge
The digital fuel gauge monitors the
amount of fuel in the tank.
When the
warning light turns on, a
message is displayed, and a chime is
sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel
are left in the tank.
Note: If the low fuel warning light turns
on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest
fuel station.
Caution!
Do not travel with the fuel tank almost
empty: any gaps in fuel supply could
damage the catalytic converter.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in miles per hour and/or
kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Instrument Cluster Display Description
The vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will
display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display
During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure
indications.
05036S0001QV
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
61
Reconfigurable
Multifunctional Display
1. Headlight Warning Lights
Displays the headlight warning light for
either of the following active modes:
Headlights
Automatic Headlights.
2. Gear Selector Information
Displays the following information
controlled by the gear selector function:
P = PARK
R = REVERSE
N = NEUTRAL
D = DRIVE, (automatic forward
speed)
AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear
in manual (sequential) driving mode; –
shifting to lower gear in sequential
driving mode.
3. Forward Collision, Lane
Departure, Cruise Control
Displays operations for the following
modes:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise
Control (ACC) — if equipped
4. Speed Limit Warning Light
Shows information regarding the Speed
Limiter function.
5. Compass
6. Reconfigurable Main Area
Can display the following screens:
Home
Trip A
Trip B (can be activated/deactivated
through the Information and
Entertainment System)
Performance
The screens can be selected, on
rotation, by pushing the MENU
selection button on the windshield
wiper stalk.
Depending on the driving mode chosen
using the “Alfa DNA Pro” (Dynamic,
Natural, Advanced Efficiency and
RACE), the screens can be graphically
different. Navigation instructions and
call information can be repeated,
besides on the Information and
Entertainment System display, also in
this area of the display, these functions
can be set on the Information and
Entertainment System.
Home
The parameters shown on the display,
for the modes: Dynamic, Natural and
Advanced Efficiency are:
Time
Outside Temperature
Current Speed (shown if the repeat
modes of the Phone and Navigation
functions are not active)
Range
05036S0002EM
MENU Selection Button
05036S0004NA
Premium Instrument Cluster
Display
62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In RACE mode, the consumption
indication index is not active and a
sports gearshift indicator is displayed.
The sports gearshift indicator is
represented by three yellow segments,
if the third indicator, characterized by
the word "SHIFT,” is on, it means that
the gear should be shifted.
Trip A And B
The "Trip computer" can be used to
display, for all driving modes (Dynamic,
Natural, Advanced Efficiency and
RACE) and with the ignition device ON,
the measurements regarding the
operating state of the vehicle. This
function is characterized by two
separate records, called “Trip A” and
“Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated
by Information and Entertainment
System), where the “complete
missions” (journeys) are recorded in a
reciprocally independent manner.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display
the values relating to:
Distance travelled
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
Active trip
Fuel consumption indicator
To reset the values, push and hold
down the button on the windshield
wiper stalk.
Performance
The displayed parameters differ
according to the active mode. The
modes which can be selected using the
“Alfa DNA Pro” system are:
Natural
05036S0055NA
Premium Instrument Cluster
Display
05036S0005NA
Race Mode
05036S0007NA
Premium Instrument Cluster
Display
05036S0002EM
Reset Button
63
The screen graphically reproduces
some parameters closely linked to the
efficiency of the driving style, with a
view to limiting consumption.
Advanced Efficiency
The three center icons on the screen
indicate the effectiveness of the driving
style, linked to the following
parameters: acceleration, deceleration
and gear shifts, with a view to limiting
consumption. The bar below the icons
shows current consumption and the
green line represents the optimal area.
The globe lights up gradually according
to lower consumption.
Dynamic
The displayed parameters are related to
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the
trend of the longitudinal/lateral
accelerations (G-meter information),
considering gravity acceleration as a
reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are also
indicated.
Race
The displayed parameters are related to
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the
trend of the longitudinal/lateral
accelerations (G-meter information),
considering gravity acceleration as a
reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are also
indicated.
7. Vehicle Range
Indicates the miles left before the fuel
tankisempty.
Displays the position by indicating the
cardinal direction.
8. Failure Warning Lights
Area dedicated to displaying failures,
the following symbols could be
displayed on rotation:
Low criticality symbols (yellow
amber).
High criticality symbols (red).
05036S0009NA
Efficiency Consumption Graph
05036S0011NA
Dynamic Driving Style
05036S0013NA
Acceleration Gauge
05036S0014NA
Acceleration Stability Gauge
64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Odometer
Indicates the total miles travelled.
PARAMETERS SET BY USER
Multiple settings can be programmed
by the user using the Information and
Entertainment System. This section
describes only the basic settings:
Units & Language
Time&Date
Cluster
To access the settings list in the
Information and Entertainment System,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU button to access
the main menu
2. Select “Settings” from the main
menu using the Rotary Knob
Units & Language
The following settings can be modified
under the “Units & Language” menu:
Measure Units: select US, metric, or
custom. The custom option allows for
individual selection of the unit measures
Language: change the language of
the system
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and change the setting, turn
and push the Rotary Pad.
Clock & Date
The following settings can be modified
under the “Clock & Date” menu:
Sync With GPS Time: activates or
deactivates the clock synchronization
through the GPS. If the function is
deactivated, the options Set Time and
Set Date are enabled.
Set Time: set the time manually
Time Format: set the time format to
either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock
Set Date: set the date manually
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and the change the setting,
turn and push the Rotary Pad.
05036S0015EM
Information and Entertainment
System
05036S0040EM
MENU button
05036S0016EM
Units & Language Selectable Menu
Options
05036S0017EM
Clock & Date Menu Option
65
Cluster
The following settings can be modified
under the “Cluster” menu:
Warning buzzer volume: set the
volume of the warning buzzer
Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip
function
Phone repeat: activate or deactivate
repeating the Phone function screens
on the instrument cluster display
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and the change the setting,
turn and push the Rotary Pad.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES ON
THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL
The following pages consist of warning
lights and messages.
Note:
The warning light turns on together
with a dedicated message and/or
chime when applicable. These
indications are precautionary and as
such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this section in the
event of a failure indication.
The failure indicators appearing on
the display are divided into two
categories: very serious and less
serious faults. Serious faults are
indicated by a repeated and prolonged
warning "cycle.” Less serious faults are
indicated by a warning "cycle" with a
shorter duration. You can stop the
warning cycle in both cases by
pushing the button located on the
windshield wiper stalk. The instrument
panel warning light will stay on until the
cause of the failure is eliminated.
05036S0018EM
Instrument Cluster Display Menu
Option
66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Warning Lights
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
ON
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to
have the system checked as soon as possible.
Release the electric park brake, then check that the
warning light has turned off.
If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized
dealer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
FAILURE
The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and
(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates
either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is
not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly
lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.
Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to
have the system inspected immediately.
67
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on
until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.
SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or
front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Safety” for further information.
OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized
dealer.
68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning!
The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not
indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on
the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an
accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked immediately.
Caution!
If the symbol turns on when driving, stop the vehicle and the engine immediately.
Amber Warning Lights
Warning
Light
What It Means What To Do
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the
Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as
soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
69
Warning
Light
What It Means What To Do
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT
The indicator light illuminates and a message is displayed to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding to
each tire in sequence.
Note:
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling
may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sudden
braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated
tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling
may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. Immediately restore the correct inflation
pressure using the Tire Repair Kit (refer to “Tire Repair Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency”) and contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning
Light
What It Means What To Do
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
71
Caution!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of
the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
Tire Pressure Low
The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
In any situation in which the message on the display is
"See Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Driving
Assistance Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with
the indications that you find there.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR
LIGHT
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system
is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it
indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip
conditions.
ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn
off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was
found in the ESC system.
In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the
indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some
active safety systems have been partially or totally
deactivated.
For further details about the active safety systems, refer
to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active
safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns
off.
REAR FOG LIGHT
The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is
activated.
ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT
(MIL)
In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as
soon as the engine is started.
The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the
traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws
and regulations of the country where you are driving.
Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue
travelling at moderate speed but without demanding
excessive effort from the engine or high speed.
Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light on
constantly may cause damage. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions
together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
73
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) —
IF EQUIPPED
This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal
collision alarm function is not enabled.
FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE
The indicator light (or the symbol in the display)
illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left
in the tank.
Warning!
If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.
74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Warning light What It Means What To Do
PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights
are turned on.
Headlight Off Delay
This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or
90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP
position.
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as
the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This
directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right
directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is
pushed.
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as
the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This
directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left
directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is
pushed.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base
Instrument Cluster Display)
This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high
beam headlights are activated.
75
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument Cluster
Display)
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are
on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you
to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a
second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
Red Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle
until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not
indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil
level must be checked under the hood.
Note:
Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.
The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the
amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked
on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by
activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and
Entertainment System. The oil level can also be
checked manually.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Caution!
If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If
the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is
allowed to cool whichever comes first.
In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and check that the coolant level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait
for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully
open the cap, top up with coolant and check that the
level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the
reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks.
Contact an authorized dealer if the telltale comes on
when the engine is started again.
If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g.
in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the
telltale stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three
minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated
to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the
engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as
described above.
POWER STEERING FAILURE
If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering
assistance and the effort required to operate the
steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however,
possible.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
77
Symbol What It Means What To Do
DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not
completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the
doors open and the vehicle moving.
Close the doors properly.
HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly
closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with
an open hood appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the
vehicle is moving.
Close the hood properly.
TRUNK LID OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly
closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with
an open trunk lid appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the
vehicle is moving.
Close the trunk lid properly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE
The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning,
to indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot
engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.
78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING
LIGHTS
This telltale, along with the related message, signals a
failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the
engine is running.
Place the ignition in the off position and the shift
selector in the park position: the telltale should turn off.
If the telltale stays on with engine running the vehicle
can still be driven.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate
intervention is required. A loss of performance,
irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take
place and the vehicle may need to be towed.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil
level falls below the minimum recommended value.
The level must also be checked using the dipstick in the
engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing and
Maintenance.")
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE
The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the
automatic steering correction system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
The illumination of the telltale with engine on
corresponds to an alternator failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
79
Amber Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
Engine Immobilizer System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine
Immobilizer system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Break-In Attempt
The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to
ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt
detected by the alarm system.
Electronic Key Not Recognized
The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and
the electronic key is not recognized by the system.
Alarm System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system
failure.
FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred
and the system has shut the fuel off.
For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to
“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant
Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If
it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an
authorized dealer.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or
is not available.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature
falls to or below 37°F (3°C).
ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED
The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.
Note:
After the first indication, each time the engine is started
the symbol will continue to illuminate as described
above until the oil is changed.
If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a
fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now
necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of
the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated
by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the
engine from reaching operating temperature.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 310 miles (500 km) after
it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.
81
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil
pressure sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level
sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM
FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
Forward Collision Warning system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
START & STOP SYSTEM FAILURE
This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop & Start
system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
automatic windshield wiper.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DUSK SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
automatic low beam alignment.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot
Monitoring system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the
following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking
lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer
lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /
rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license
plate lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown
protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical
connection.
Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an
authorized dealer.
KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off
system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM
FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the
Lane Departure Warning system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the
automatic high beam headlights.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
83
Symbol What It Means What To Do
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING
The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission
overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this
case an engine performance limitation is carried out.
Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or
idling.
AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio
system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE
While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed
Limiter system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP
Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly
closed.
Tighten the cap properly.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to
signal a failure in the electric park brake system.
This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle
because the park brake could remain activated even if
automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant
controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage
the park brake following the emergency disengagement
procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”
If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not
engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and
remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,
that the electric park brake is not operational.
Warning!
If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.
84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED
This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle
coolant level is low.
Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.”
SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is not operating and needs service.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
WEAR ON BRAKE PADS
This light will illuminate when the brake pads have
reached their wear limit.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note:
Always use genuine parts or similar because the
Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect
anomalies.
WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED
This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake
discs have reached their wear limit.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Warning!
It is recommended to use only original or equivalent, bench-tested spare pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking
system.
85
Symbol What It Means What To Do
DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the
dynamic drive control system.
WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE
Signals a windshield wiper failure.
Contact an authorized dealer.
GENERIC INDICATION
Signals information and failures.
The accompanying messages describe the failure.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE
This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive
system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the failure eliminated.
AFS SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic
directional light system failure.
Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable
suspension setting is activated.
SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IF EQUIPPED
While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure
in the suspension system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system
checked.
WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL
The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the
windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.
To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the
features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section
in “Technical Specifications.”
86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Symbols
Symbol What It Means
HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.
START & STOP OPERATION
The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start & Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).
When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And
Operating”).
SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED
The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.
Blue Symbols
Symbol What it means
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.
87
ONBOARD
DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM
Operation
The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system)
carries out a continuous diagnosis of
the components of the vehicle related
to emissions.
It also alerts the driver of when these
components are no longer in peak
condition by switching on the
warning light on the instrument
panel (see “Warning Lights And
Messages” paragraph in this chapter).
The aim of the OBD system (Onboard
Diagnostic) is to:
Monitor the efficiency of the system
Indicate an increase in emissions
Indicate the need to replace
damaged components
The vehicle also has a connector, which
can interface with appropriate tools,
that makes it possible to read the error
codes stored in the electronic control
units together with a series of specific
parameters for engine operation and
diagnosis. This check can be carried
out by your authorized dealer.
Note: After eliminating a fault, to check
the system completely, your authorized
dealer is obliged to run tests and, if
necessary certain road tests.
Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an
Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II)
and a connection port to allow access
to information related to the
performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians
may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system.
Warning!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
This very important section describes
the safety systems that your vehicle
may be equipped with, and provides
instructions on how to use them
correctly.
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ......90
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS....93
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS ................103
SAFETY TIPS ..............127
89
ACTIVE SAFETY
SYSTEMS
The vehicle may be equipped with the
following active safety devices:
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System
Drive Train Control (DTC) System
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System
Traction Control System (TCS)
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
System
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)
System
For the operation of the systems, see
the following pages.
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS)
System
An integral part of the braking system,
the ABS prevents one or more wheels
from locking and slipping in all road
surface conditions, regardless of the
intensity of the braking action. The
system ensures that the vehicle can be
controlled even during emergency
braking, allowing the driver to optimize
stopping distances.
The system intervenes during braking
when the wheels are about to lock,
typically in emergency braking or
low-grip conditions where locking may
be more frequent.
The system also improves control and
stability of the vehicle when braking on
a surface where the grip of the left and
right wheels varies, such as in a corner.
The Electronic Braking Force
Distribution (EBD) system works with
the ABS, allowing the brake force to be
distributed between the front and rear
wheels.
System Intervention
The ABS equipped on this vehicle is
provided with the "Brake-by-wire"
(Integrated Brake System - IBS)
function. With this system, the
command given by pressing the brake
pedal is not transmitted hydraulically,
but electrically. Therefore, the light
pulsation that is felt on the pedal with
the traditional system is no longer
noticeable.
Warning!
The ABS contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be
susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead to
a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down
or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Drive Train Control
(DTC) System — If
Equipped
Some models of this vehicle are
equipped with an All-Wheel Drive
system (AWD), which offers an optimal
drive for countless driving conditions
and road surfaces. The system reduces
the slipping of the tires to a minimum,
automatically redistributing the torque
to the front and rear wheels as needed.
To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle
with AWD automatically passes to
rear-wheel drive (RWD) when the road
90
SAFETY
and environmental conditions are such
that they wouldn't cause the tires to
slip. When the road and environmental
conditions require better traction, the
vehicle automatically goes to AWD
mode.
The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is
shown on the instrument cluster
display.
Note: If the system failure symbol
switches on, after starting the engine or
while driving, it means that the AWD
system is not working properly. If the
warning message activates frequently, it
is recommended to carry out the
maintenance operations.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) System
The ESC system improves the
directional control and stability of the
vehicle in various driving conditions.
The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s
understeer and oversteer, distributing
the brake force on the appropriate
wheels. The torque supplied by the
engine can also be reduced in order to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The ESC system uses sensors installed
on the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to follow and
compares it with the vehicle’s effective
path. When the real path deviates from
the desired path, the ESC system
intervenes to counter the vehicle’s
understeer or oversteer.
Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is
turning more than it should according
to the angle of the steering wheel.
Understeer occurs when the vehicle
is turning less than it should according
to the angle of the steering wheel.
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel,
to inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
Warning!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to
properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking
system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance.
Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires
may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness
of the ESC system can increase the risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The system automatically operates in
the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet
roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration
on one or both drive wheels on roads
that are slippery, snowy, icy, etc.
Depending on the slipping conditions,
two different control systems are
activated:
If the slipping involves both drive
wheels, the system intervenes, reducing
the power transmitted by the engine.
If the slipping only involves one of the
drive wheels, the Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) function is activated,
automatically braking the wheel which
is slipping (the behavior of a self-locking
differential is simulated). This will
increase the engine torque transferred
to the wheel which isn't slipping.
91
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel,
to inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
Panic Brake Assist
(PBA) System
The PBA system is designed to improve
the vehicle’s braking capacity during
emergency braking.
The system detects emergency braking
by monitoring the speed and force with
which the brake pedal is pressed, and
consequently applies the optimal brake
pressure. This can reduce the braking
distance: the PBA system therefore
complements the ABS.
Maximum assistance from the PBA
system is obtained by pressing the
brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the
brake pedal should be pressed
continuously during braking, avoiding
intermittent presses, to get the most
out of the system. Do not reduce
pressure on the brake pedal until
braking is no longer necessary.
The PBA system is deactivated when
the brake pedal is released.
Warning!
The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a PBA-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
System
This is an integral part of the ESC
system and facilitates starting on
slopes, activating automatically in the
following cases:
Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or gear
other than REVERSE (R) engaged.
Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and reverse
gear engaged.
When setting off, the ESC system
control unit maintains the braking
pressure on the wheels until the engine
torque necessary for starting is
reached, or in any case for a maximum
of two seconds, allowing your right foot
to be moved easily from the brake
pedal to the accelerator.
The system will automatically deactivate
after two seconds without starting,
gradually releasing the braking
pressure. During this release stage, it is
possible to hear a typical mechanical
brake release noise, indicating the
imminent movement of the vehicle.
Warning!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
92
SAFETY
Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST) System
The DST function uses the integration
of the ESC system with the electric
power steering to increase the safety
level of the whole vehicle.
In critical situations (braking on surfaces
with different grip conditions), the ESC
system controls the steering through
the DST function to implement an
additional torque contribution on the
steering wheel in order to suggest the
most correct maneuver to the driver.
The coordinated action of the brakes
and steering increases the sensation of
safety and control of the vehicle.
Note: The DST feature is only meant to
help the driver realize the correct course
of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the
applied torque. It is very important to
realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Active Torque Vectoring
(ATV) System
The dynamic drive control is used to
optimize and balance the drive torque
between the wheels of the same axles.
The ATV system improves the grip in
turns, sending more drive torque to the
external wheel.
Given that, in a turn, the external
wheels of the car travel more than the
internal ones and therefore turn faster,
sending a higher thrust to the exter nal
rear wheel allows for the car to be more
stable and to not suffer an "understeer"
condition. Understeer occurs when the
vehicle is turning less than appropriate
for the steering wheel position.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
The following auxiliary driving systems
are available in this vehicle:
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) System
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
system uses two radar sensors, located
in the rear bumper (one for each side),
to detect the presence of other vehicles
in the rear side blind spots of your
vehicle.
06016S0001EM
Rear Sensor Location
93
The system warns the driver about the
presence of other vehicles in the
detection area by illuminating the
warning light located within the door
mirror on the side in which the other
vehicle was detected.
When the engine is started the war ning
light turns on to signal the driver that
the system is active.
Sensors
The sensors are activated when any
forward gear is engaged at a speed
higher than approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or when REVERSE is
engaged.
The sensors are temporarily deactivated
when the vehicle is stationary and in
PARK (P).
The detection area of the system
covers approximately a lane on both
sides of the vehicle which is around 9 ft
(3 m).
This area begins from the door mirror
and extends for approximately 19 ft
(6 m) towards the rear part of the
vehicle.
When the sensors are active, the
system monitors the detection areas on
both sides of the vehicle and war ns the
driver about the possible presence of
vehicles in these areas.
While driving, the system monitors the
detection area from three different input
points (side, rear and front) to check
whether an alert needs to be sent to the
driver. The system can detect the
presence of a vehicle in one of these
three areas.
Note:
The system does not alert the driver
for the presence of fixed object (e.g.
safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).
However, in some circumstances, the
system may activate in the presence of
these objects. This is normal and does
not indicate a system malfunction.
The system does not alert the driver
about the presence of vehicles coming
from the opposite direction, in the
adjacent lanes.
Warning!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only
an aid to help detect objects in the blind
spot zones. The BSM system is not
designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result
in serious injury or death.
Note:
For the system to operate correctly,
the rear bumper area where the radar
sensors are located must stay free
from snow, ice and dirt gathered from
the road surface.
Do not cover the rear bumper area
where the radar sensors are located
with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike
rack, etc.).
If you wish to install the tow hook
after purchasing the vehicle, you need
to deactivate the system via the
Information and Entertainment System.
To access the function, select the
following items in sequence on the
main menu: "Settings", "Safety", and
"Blind Spot Alert".
06016S0002EM
BSM Indicator Light
94
SAFETY
Rear View
The system detects vehicles coming
from the rear part of your vehicle on
both sides and entering the rear
detection area with a difference in
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h)
with relation to your vehicle.
Overtaking Vehicles
If another vehicle is overtaken slowly,
with a difference in speed of less than
approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and
the vehicle stays in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light on the door mirror of the
corresponding side illuminates.
If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than
approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the
warning light does not illuminate.
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP)
System
This system helps the driver during
reverse maneuvers in the case of
reduced visibility.
The RCP system monitors the rear
detection areas on both sides of the
vehicle to detect objects moving
towards the sides of the vehicle, with a
minimum speed between approximately
1 mph (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h)
and objects moving at a maximum
speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areas
such as parking lots.
The system activation is signaled to the
driver by an acoustic warning.
Note: If the sensors are covered by
objects or vehicles, the system will not
warn the driver.
Warning!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming
vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even
when using RCP. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Operating Mode
The system may be activated/
deactivated via the Information and
Entertainment System. To access the
function, select the following items on
the main menu in sequence: "Settings",
"Safety" and "Blind Spot Alert".
"Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" Mode
When the system is enabled, the
warning light within the door mirror on
the side of the detected object
illuminates.
The visual warning on the mirror will
blink if the driver activates the tur n
signals, thus indicating the intention to
change lane.
The warning will be fixed if the driver
stays in the same lane.
"Blind Spot Alert" Function
Deactivation
When the system is deactivated ("Blind
Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP
systems will not emit neither an
acoustic nor visual warnings.
The BSM system will store the
operating mode running when the
engine was stopped. Each time the
engine is started, the operating mode
stored previously will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate
on radio frequency that comply with
Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards RSS-
GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
95
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) System
This is a driving assistance system
which comprises a radar located
behind the front bumper and a camera
located in the central part of the
windshield.
In the event of an imminent collision,
the system intervenes by automatically
braking the vehicle to prevent the crash
or reduce its effects.
The system provides the driver with
audible and visual signals through
specific messages on the instrument
cluster display.
The system may lightly brake to war n
the driver if a possible frontal accident is
detected (limited braking). Signals and
limited braking are intended to allow the
driver to react promptly, in order to
prevent or reduce the effects of a
potential accident.
In situations with the risk of collision, if
the system detects no intervention by
the driver, it provides automatic braking
to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential frontal collision (automatic
braking). If intervention by the driver on
the brake pedal is detected, but not
deemed sufficient, the system may
intervene in order to improve the
reaction of the braking system,
therefore reducing vehicle speed further
(additional assistance in braking stage).
The system will intervene automatically
in case of imminent collision or impact
against a pedestrian crossing the road
(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).
Note: For safety reasons, when the
vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers
may remain blocked for about two
seconds. Make sure you press the
brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly
forward.
Warning!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or
death.
Engagement/Disengagement
The following functions can be selected
in sequence using the Information and
Entertainment System: “Settings”,
“Safety”, “Forward Collision Warning”
and "Mode". Select from among three
operating modes:
Warning And Brake: the system (if
active), in addition to the visual and
audible warnings, provides limited
braking, automatic braking and
additional assistance in braking stage,
where the driver does not brake
sufficiently in the event of a potential
frontal impact.
Only Warning: the system (if active),
does not provide limited braking, but
guarantees automatic braking or
additional assistance in braking stage,
where the driver does not brake at all or
not sufficiently in the event of a potential
frontal impact.
06016S0003EM
Front Bumper Radar Location
06016S0004EM
Windshield Camera Location
96
SAFETY
Disable: the system does not
provide visual and audible warnings,
limited braking, automatic braking or
additional assistance in braking stage.
The system will therefore provide no
indication of a possible accident.
Activation/Deactivation
The Forward Collision Warning system
is activated whenever the engine is
started regardless of what is shown on
the Information and Entertainment
System.
Following a deactivation, the system will
not warn the driver about the possible
collision with the preceding vehicle,
regardless of the setting selected with
the Information and Entertainment
System.
Note: Each time the engine is started,
the system is activated regardless of
what setting was selected when it was
previously switched off.
This function is not active at a speed
lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher
than 124 mph (200 km/h).
The system is active when:
The engine is started.
Is active (on) in the Information and
Entertainment System.
The ignition is in the ON position.
The vehicle speed is between 4 mph
(7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).
The front seat belts are fastened.
The Alfa DNA Pro Selector is not in
“RACE” position (where present).
Changing The System Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the system can be
changed through the Information and
Entertainment System menu, choosing
from one of the following three options:
"Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the
description in the “Information and
Entertainment System Supplement” for
how to change the settings.
The pre-set option is "Med". With this
setting, the system warns the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in
front when that vehicle is at a standard
distance, between that of the other two
settings.
With the system sensitivity set to "Far",
the system will warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in
front when that vehicle is at a greater
distance, thus providing the possibility
of acting on the brakes more lightly and
gradually. This setting provides the
drivers with the maximum possible
reaction time to prevent a potential
accident.
With the option set to "Near", the
system will alert the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front when
that vehicle is close. This setting offers
the driver a lower reaction time
compared to the "Med" and "Far"
settings, in the event of a potential
collision, but permits more dynamic
driving of the vehicle.
The system sensitivity setting is kept in
the memory when the engine is
switched off.
System Limited Operation Signal
If the dedicated message is displayed,
a condition limiting the system
operation may have occurred. The
possible reasons of this limitation are
something blocking the camera view or
a fault.
If an obstruction is signaled, clean the
area of the windshield indicated in.
Although the vehicle can still be driven
in normal conditions, the system may
be not completely available.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, this will go back to
normal and complete operation. Should
the fault persist, contact an authorized
dealer.
System Failure Signaling
If the system switches off and a
dedicated message is shown on the
display, it means that there is a fault on
the system.
In this case, it is still possible to drive
the vehicle, but you are advised to
contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Radar Indication Not Available
If conditions are such that the radar
cannot detect obstacles correctly, the
system is deactivated and a dedicated
message appears on the display. This
generally occurs in the event of poor
97
visibility, such as when it is snowing or
raining heavily.
The system can also be temporarily
dimmed due to obstructions such as
mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such
cases, a dedicated message will be
shown on the display and the system
will be deactivated. This message can
sometimes appear in conditions of high
reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective
tiles or ice or snow). When the
conditions limiting the system functions
end, this will go back to normal and
complete operation.
In certain particular cases, this
dedicated message could be displayed
when the radar is not detecting any
vehicles or objects within its view range.
If atmospheric conditions are not the
real reason behind this message, check
if the sensor is dirty. It could be
necessary to clean or remove any
obstructions in the area.
If the message appears often, even in
the absence of atmospheric conditions
such as snow, rain, mud or other
obstructions, contact an authorized
dealer for a sensor alignment check.
In the absence of visible obstructions,
manually removing the decorative cover
trim and cleaning the radar surface
could be required. Have this operation
performed at an authorized dealer.
Note: It is recommended that you do
not install devices, accessories or
aerodynamic attachments in front of the
sensor or darken it in any way, as this
can compromise the correct functioning
of the system.
Frontal Collision Alarm With Active
Braking — If Equipped
If this function is selected, the brakes
are operated to reduce the speed of the
vehicle in the event of potential frontal
impact.
This function applies an additional
braking pressure if the braking pressure
applied by the driver does not suffice to
prevent potential frontal impact.
The function is active with speed above
4 mph (7 km/h).
Driving In Special Conditions
In certain driving conditions, such as,
for example:
Driving close to a bend.
The vehicle ahead is leaving a
roundabout.
Vehicles with small dimensions
and/or not aligned in the driving lane.
Lane change by other vehicles.
Vehicles travelling at right angles to
the vehicle.
System intervention might be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must
therefore be very careful, keeping
control of the vehicle to drive in
complete safety.
Note: In particularly complex traffic
conditions, the driver can deactivate the
system manually through the
Information and Entertainment System.
Driving Close To A Bend
When entering or leaving a wide bend,
the system may detect a vehicle in front
you, but not driving on the same driving
lane. In cases such as these, the
system may intervene.
The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A
Roundabout
On a roundabout, the system could
intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead
which is leaving the roundabout.
06016S0005EM
Driving Around Wide Curves
98
SAFETY
Vehicles With Small Dimensions
And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving
Lane
The system cannot detect vehicles in
front of you but outside the range of the
radar sensor and may therefore not
react in the presence of small vehicles,
such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Lane Change By Other Vehicles
Vehicles suddenly changing lane,
entering the driving lane of the vehicle
and inside the radar sensor operating
range, may cause system activation.
Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles
To The Vehicle
The system may temporarily react to a
vehicle that is passing through the radar
sensor’s operating range at right
angles.
Warning!
The system has not been designed to
prevent impacts and cannot detect
possible conditions leading to an accident
in advance. Failure to take into account this
warning may lead to serious or fatal
injuries.
The system may activate, assessing the
trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of
reflecting metal objects different from other
vehicles, such as safety barriers, road
signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates,
level crossings, gates, railways, objects
near road constructions sites or higher than
the vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same
way, the system may intervene inside
multi-story parking lots or tunnels, or due
to a glare on the road surface. These
possible activations are a consequence of
the real driving scenario coverage by the
system and must not be regarded as
faults.
The system has been designed for road
use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track,
the system must be deactivated to avoid
unnecessary warnings. Automatic
deactivation is signaled by the dedicated
warning light/symbol switching on in the
instrument panel (refer to the instructions in
the "Warning Lights And Messages On The
Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel" for further information).
06016S0010EM
Driving In Roundabouts
06016S0006EM
Driving Near Small Vehicles
06016S0007EM
Other Vehicles Changing Lanes
06016S0008EM
Other Vehicle Passing Through
Radar Range
99
Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that sends the inflation pressure
information of each tire to the control
unit, and will signal the driver in the
event of insufficient tire pressure.
Tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every
12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will also decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal, and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will signal the driver if
pressure falls below the warning limit for
any reason, including the effects of low
temperature and normal loss of
pressure from the tire.
The TPMS will stop indicating
insufficient tire pressure when pressure
is equal to or greater than the
prescribed cold inflation level.
Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure is
indicated by the (
) warning light
displaying in the instrument cluster,
increase the inflation pressure up to the
prescribed cold inflation value.
The system will automatically update,
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Operating Example
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more
than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the
measuredtirepressureis28psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F
(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
100
SAFETY
Caution!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to
use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM
feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATION
If an insufficient pressure value is
detected on one or more tires, the
warning light in the instrument
cluster will display alongside the
dedicated messages, the system will
highlight the tire or tires with insufficient
pressure graphically, and an acoustic
signal will be emitted.
In this case, stop the vehicle, check the
inflation pressure of each tire, and
inflate the necessary tire or tires to the
correct cold inflation pressure value,
shown on the display or in the
dedicated TPMS menu.
TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED
TPMS Check Message
When a system fault is detected, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition is
cycled, this sequence will repeat,
provided that the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the
same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket
window tinting that affects radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
After the punctured tire has been
repaired with the original tire sealant
contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the
previous condition must be restored so
that the
warning light is off during
normal driving.
TPMS Deactivation
The TPMS can be deactivated by
replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
101
Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster.
Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place
of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with tires equipped with TPM sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale
Light" will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed, as long as no system fault
exists.
Note:
The TPMS is not intended to
replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a
tire pressure gauge while adjusting
your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire will cause the tire to
overheat, and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.
Seasonal temperature changes will
affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will
monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all radio frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference.
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
102
SAFETY
OCCUPANT
RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety
features in your vehicle are the restraint
systems:
Occupant Restraint
Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described
in this section may be standard
equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are
not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety
Precautions
Please pay close attention to the
information in this section. It tells you
how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can
take to minimize the risk of harm from a
deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under
should always ride buckled up in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not
in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride
in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information).
3. Children that are not big enough to
wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer
to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information) should be secured
in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats should ride properly
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
5. You should read the instructions
provided with your child restraint to
make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear
their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as
practical to allow the front air bags
room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or
window. If your vehicle has side air
bags, and deployment occurs, the side
air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle
needs to be modified to accommodate
a disabled person, refer to the
“Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying
passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an
excellent driver, even on short trips.
Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts
save lives, and they can reduce the
seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen
103
when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use
Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If
Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to
remind the driver and outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will tur n
on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is
activated when the vehicle is moving
above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat
Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver
and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the
seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets
be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or
deactivated by your authorized dealer.
FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
Note: If BeltAlert has been deactivated
and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock
only during very sudden stops or
collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
104
SAFETY
Warning!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you are
not properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Occupants, including the driver, should
always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into
a single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
Warning!
A lap belt worn too high can increase
the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low
as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to your authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the
wrong buckle will not protect you properly.
The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you
could move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm
is dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are
meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
105
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door.
Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the
back of the front seat, and next to your
arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below
your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the
red button on the buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the
seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist
a twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to
30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and
twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing
mustentertheslotatthetopofthe
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up
until it clears the folded webbing and
the seat belt is no longer twisted.
06046S0001NA
Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into
Seat Belt Buckle
106
SAFETY
Second Row Center Seat Belt
Operating Instructions
The second row center seat belt
features a seat belt with a mini-latch
plate and buckle, which allows the seat
belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate can then
be stored out of the way in the parcel
tray for added convenience to open up
utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate from its stowed
position in the right rear side trim panel.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull
the seat belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside
of the right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular
latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below
your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your
chest so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the
red button on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate
from the mini-buckle for storage, insert
the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to
its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert
the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate into its stowed position.
Warning!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle
are not properly connected when the seat
belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt
will not be able to provide proper restraint
and will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
06056S0002EM
Second Row Seat Belts
1 — Seat
Belt Buckle
3 — Mini
Latch Plate
5 — Mini
Buckle
Release
2 — Seat
Belt Latch
Plate
4 — Mini
Seat Belt
Buckle
107
When reattaching the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt
webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is
twisted, follow the preceding procedure to
detach the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle.
Seat Belts And Pregnant
Women
Seat belts must be worn by all
occupants including pregnant women:
the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and
the unborn child if they are wearing a
seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low
below the abdomen and across the
strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and
away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These
devices may improve the performance
of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Note: These devices are not a
substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and
positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with
an Energy Management feature in the
front seating positions that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraints” section of
this manual. The figure below illustrates
the locking feature for each seating
position.
If the passenger seating position is
equipped with an ALR and is being
used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is
activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the
0226075266
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
06086S0102NA
ALR — Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor
108
SAFETY
amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the
shoulder belt is automatically
pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt
with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly
restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying
passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic
Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the
seat belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
Warning!
The seat belt assembly must be
replaced if the switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any
other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint
Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described
in this section may be standard
equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are
not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to
protect you in a collision. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air
Bag System Components. Your vehicle
may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
109
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or
in the ACC position, the air bag system
is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power
supply system that may deploy the air
bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for
approximately four to eight seconds for
a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it
turnsontheAirBagWarningLight,
either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that
will illuminate the instrument panel Air
Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not
come on during the four to eight
seconds when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains
on after the four to eight-second
interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while
driving.
Note: If the speedometer, tachometer,
or any engine related gauges are not
working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Warning!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
stay on until the fault is cleared. In
addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault
has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. For additional
information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning
Lights And Messages” in the “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and
lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and
front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
110
SAFETY
Warning!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying
passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system
has multistage driver and front
passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered
immediately during an impact that
requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a
driver and/or front passenger seat belt
buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with
driver and/or front passenger seat track
position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags based upon seat position.
Warning!
No objects should be placed over or
near the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
06106S0001EM
Driver Air Bag
06106S0002EM
Passenger Air Bag
111
Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing
the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage —
for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the
type and location of impact, front air
bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure
vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle
speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not
an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your
protection in all collisions, and also are
needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision
requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and
the upper right side of the instrument
panel separate and fold out of the way
as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect
the knees of the driver and front
passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with
the front air bags.
Warning!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The
Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the
seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
06096S0102NA
Driver Knee Air Bag
06096S0103NA
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag
112
SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types
of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags (SABs): Located in the
outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk
of occupant injury during certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the
seam on the outboard side of the
seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the
door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Warning!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs): Located above the
side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of
head or other injuries to front and rear
seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward,
covering the side windows. An inflating
SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they
are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where
the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
Warning!
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side
windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as
intended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter the
roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or
screws) for installation on the vehicle roof.
Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for
any reason.
06106S0004EM
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag
06106S0005EM
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Location
113
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags)
are designed to activate in certain side
impacts and certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side
Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the
seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags
deploy in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes.
Warning!
Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your
protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must
wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
Warning!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
Note: Air bag covers may not be
obvious in the interior trim, but they will
open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the
Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and
a right side impact deploys the right
Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
side collisions, including some collisions
at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of
the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate
in certain rollover events. The ORC
determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover
event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
114
SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing
system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether
deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or
near rollover event, and deployment of
the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle
occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with
electrical Air Bag System Components
listed below:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to
deflate immediately after deployment.
Note: Front and/or side air bags will
not deploy in all collisions. This does
not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys
the air bags, any or all of the following
may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes
cause abrasions and/or skin reddening
to the occupants as the air bags deploy
and unfold. The abrasions are similar to
friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see
some smoke-like particles. The
particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic
gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool
water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle
on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air
bags have deployed. If you are involved
in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
Warning!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in
another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have
the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
Note:
Air bag covers may not be obvious
in the interior trim, but they will open
during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle
should be taken to an authorized
dealer immediately.
115
Enhanced Accident Response
System
In the event of an impact, if the
communication network remains intact,
and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have
the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the
battery has power or until the hazard
light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing
the hazard light button.
Turn on the interior lights, which
remain on as long as the battery has
power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if
equipped).
Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear
selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
Enhanced Accident Response
System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the
system is active, a message regarding
fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition
switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event
the left and right turn signal lights,
located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to
the side of the road, you must follow
the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
Note:
Each step MUST BE held for at least
two seconds
1. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
(Turn Signal Must be
placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
116
SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
Note:
Each step MUST BE held for at least
two seconds
8. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn
signal switch OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch
Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
(Entire sequence
needs to be
completed within
one minute or
sequence will need
to be repeated).
System is now reset
and the engine may
be started.
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not
completed within 60 seconds, then the
turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in
order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag
System
Warning!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part
of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle that
it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of
your air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could
117
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be
buckled up at all times, including babies
and children. Every state in the United
States, and every Canadian province,
requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should
rideproperlybuckledupinarearseat,
if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
Warning!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on
your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of
restraints for children from newborn size
to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying
that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure
that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
Note:
For additional information, refer to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm
or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to
Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
118
SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children
who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children
ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they
are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing:
infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used
rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height
limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either
rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the
rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest
weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying
passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child
Restraints
Children who are two years old or who
have outgrown their rear-facing
convertible child seat can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the
forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat
119
with a harness for as long as possible,
up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is
above the forward-facing limit for the
child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and belt-positioning booster seat are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Warning!
Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with a seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster
Seats
Children who are large enough to wear
the shoulder belt comfortably, and
whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their
back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether
the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back
against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the front of the vehicle
seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the
child’s shoulder between their neck and
arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions
was “no,” then the child still needs to
use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move
the belt out of position. If the shoulder
belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Warning!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
120
SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up
to
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called
LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points for installing LATCH-equipped
child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage
located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
022668173
LATCH Label
06086S0101NA
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
121
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorage?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
The rear outboard head restraints can be
removed.
122
SAFETY
Locating The LATCH
Anchorages
The lower anchorages
are round bars that are
found at the rear of the
seat cushion where it
meets the seatback,
below the anchorage
symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether
Anchorages
There are tether strap
anchorages behind
each rear seating
position located in the
panel between the rear
seatback and the rear
window. They are
found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint
systems will be equipped with a rigid
bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a
way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a
hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Warning!
Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for installing
child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing
your child restraint. Not all child restraint
systems will be installed as described
here.
06086S0009EM
LATCH Anchorage Locations
1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar
2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations
06086S0104NA
Upper Tether Anchorage Location
123
To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below.
See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap of the
child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the
lower anchorages for that seating
position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child
seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or
connectors of the child restraint to the
lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether
strap, connect it to the top tether
anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push
the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is
installed tightly by pulling back and forth
on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused
Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching
system to install a child restraint, stow
all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used
to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with
it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If
the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint,
route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not
play with them.
Warning!
Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
124
SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts
or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
Warning!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to
keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip.
The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then
letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the
webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant
Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the
following sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
06086S0102NA
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
125
Installing A Child Restraint With
A Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts
or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
Warning!
Improper installation or failure to
properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of
the seating position. For some second
row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the
belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on
the shoulder part of the belt until you
have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the
retractor. If it is locked, you should not
be able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion
around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether
strap and the seating position has a top
tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is
installed tightly by pulling back and forth
on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally,
and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using
The Top Tether Anchorage:
Warning!
Do not attach a tether strap for a
rear-facing car seat to any location in front
of the car seat, including the seat frame or
a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
126
SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position
where you plan to install the child
restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the
anchor directly behind the seat where
you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path for the strap between
the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint,
and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the
tether strap around the outboard side of
the head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the
child restraint to the top tether
anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap does
not slip into the opening between the
seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat
could harm your pet. An unrestrained
pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear
seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting
Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN
THE CARGO AREA.
Warning!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
06086S0104NA
Upper Tether Anchorage Location
127
Exhaust Gas
Warning!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
The best protection against carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle body is
a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the
sound of the exhaust system, when
exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle, or when the underside or
rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You
Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
and loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged
(i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the
defrost mode and place the blower
control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See your authorized dealer
for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that
does not interfere with the operation of
the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of
your vehicle in other ways.
128
SAFETY
Warning!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured
to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall
or slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks
You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear
and uneven wear patterns. Check for
stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect
the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for
proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation
of brake lights and exterior lights while
you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on
the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and
locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after
overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil,
or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake
fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected
immediately.
129
STARTING AND OPERATING
Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and
see how you can explore its fullest
potential. We’ll look at how to drive
safely in any situation, making it a
welcome companion with our comfort
and wallets in mind.
STARTINGTHEENGINE .......131
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE .......134
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .136
ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR .....142
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION
(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED .........145
STOP/START SYSTEM ........146
SPEED LIMITER .............148
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
(CRUISE CONTROL) ..........149
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ........151
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM ......158
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM .............163
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA/
DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ........166
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ......168
VEHICLELOADING ..........169
TRAILER TOWING ...........170
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING. . . .171
130
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE
ENGINE
Before starting the engine, be sure to
adjust the seat, the interior rear view
mirrors, and the door mirrors, and
fasten the seat belt correctly.
Never press the accelerator pedal
before starting the engine.
If necessary, messages indicating the
starting procedure can be shown in the
display.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Starting Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the electric park brake and set
the gear selector to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal
without touching the accelerator.
3. Briefly push the ignition button.
4. If the engine doesn't start within a
few seconds, you need to repeat the
procedure.
If the problem persists, contact an
authorized dealer.
Warning!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission cannot be
started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Emergency Starting” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more
than 25 seconds at a time. Wait
60 seconds before trying again.
Remote Starting System
— If Equipped
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of at
least 300 feet (91 meters).
The remote starting system also
activates the climate control (if
equipped), the heated seats (if
equipped), and the heated steering
wheel (if equipped), depending on
temperatures outside and inside of the
vehicle.
131
Note:
The vehicle must be equipped with
an automatic transmission in order to
include remote start.
Obstructions between the vehicle
and key fob may reduce this range.
How to use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be
met before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK (P).
Doors closed.
Hood closed.
Trunk closed.
Hazard switch off.
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal
not pressed).
Battery at an acceptable charge
level.
PANIC button not pushed.
System not disabled from previous
remote start event.
Vehicle alarm system indicator
flashing.
Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped
with keyless ignition system).
Fuel level meets minimum
requirement.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the
heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start also until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper
De–Icer Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less
than 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote
start will resume previous operation,
except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active.
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
Extended Park Starting
If the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 35 days, it is
advisable to follow the indications
below.
To start the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the ignition button
2. If the engine does not start, wait five
seconds and let the starter cool down
and then repeat the starting procedure
3. If the engine does not start after
eight attempts, let the starter cool down
for at least 10 seconds, and then repeat
the starting procedure
If the problem persists, contact your
authorized dealer.
Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity,
very difficult starting, that can be
noticed through rapid fatigue of the
starter, might also be due to a
discharged battery. In this case, see the
"Emergency Starting" section in the "In
Case Of Emergency" chapter.
If Engine Fails To Start
Starting the Engine with Key Fob
Battery Run Down or Drained
If the ignition does not respond when
the button is pushed, the key fob
battery might be run down or drained.
Therefore, the system does not detect
the presence of the key fob in the
vehicle, and will display a dedicated
message.
In this case, follow the instructions
outlined in "Starting With A Discharged
Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" chapter, and start
the engine normally.
Warning!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission cannot be
started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
132
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Emergency Starting” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more
than 25 seconds at a time. Wait
60 seconds before trying again.
After Starting —
Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at
a reduced RPM, without accelerating
suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the
digital engine coolant temperature
indicator starts to rise for maximum
performance.
Stopping The Engine
To stop the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Park the vehicle in a position that is
not dangerous for oncoming traffic.
2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.
3. With engine idling, push the
START/STOP button on the steering
wheel to STOP the engine.
Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON
mode when the engine is off.
To shut off the engine with vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you
must push and hold the ignition or push
the START/STOP button three times
consecutively within a few seconds.
The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the ON mode
With the keyless ignition system, it is
possible to go away from the vehicle
taking the key fob with you, without the
engine switching off. The vehicle will
inform about the absence of the key on
board, only if the doors are closed.
Stopping the engine (cycling from the
ON to the STOP position) the
accessories are still powered for about
three minutes, or until a door is opened.
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF
mode, the window switches remain
active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to
allow the temperature inside the engine
compartment to cool before shutting off
the engine.
Turbocharger Cool
Down
Before switching the engine off, keep it
idling for a few minutes so that the
turbocharger can be suitably lubricated.
This procedure is particularly
recommended after severe driving.
After a full load operation, keep the
engine idling for three to five minutes
before switching it off.
This time allows the lubricating oil and
the engine coolant to eliminate the
excessive heat from combustion
chamber, bearings, inner components
and turbocharger.
133
ELECTRIC PARK
BRAKE
The vehicle is equipped with electric
park brake to guarantee better use and
optimal performance compared to a
manually operated park brake.
The electric parking brake features a
switch located on the center console, a
motor with caliper for each rear wheel,
and an electronic control module.
The electric parking brake can be
engaged in two ways:
Manually, by pulling the switch on the
center console.
Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto
Park Brake" conditions.
Note: Normally, the electric parking
brake is engaged automatically when
the engine is stopped. This function can
be deactivated/activated on the
Information and Entertainment system
by selecting the following items in
sequence on the main menu:
"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and
"Automatic Parking Brake".
In addition to engaging the electric park
brake, along with steering and
positioning chocks in front of the
wheels (when on a steep slope), you
must always place the vehicle in the
PARK (P) mode before leaving.
Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the
battery must be replaced in order to
unlock the electric park brake.
Engaging The Park Brake Manually
Briefly pull the switch located on the
center console to manually engage the
electric park brake when the vehicle is
stationary.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the
vehicle when engaging the electric
parking brake.
A slight movement of the brake pedal
may be detected when engaging the
electric parking brake with the brake
pedal pressed.
With the electric parking brake
engaged, the BRAKE warning light on
the instrument panel and the switch will
illuminate.
Caution!
With the Electronic Parking Brake failure
warning light on, some functions of the
electric parking brake are deactivated. In
this case the driver is responsible for brake
activation and vehicle parking in complete
safety conditions.
If, under exceptional circumstances, the
use of the brake is required with the
vehicle in motion, keep the switch on
the center console pulled as long as the
brake action is necessary.
The BRAKE warning light may turn on
with the hydraulic system temporarily
unavailable, in this case braking is
controlled by the motors.
The brake lights will also automatically
turn on in the same way as for normal
braking with the use of the brake pedal.
Release the switch on the center
console to stop the braking action with
the vehicle in motion.
If, through this procedure, the vehicle is
braked until a speed below 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is
kept pulled, the park brake will
definitively engage.
Note: Driving the vehicle with the
electric parking brake engaged, or
using it several times to slow down the
vehicle, may cause severe damage to
the braking system.
07046S0001EM
Electric Park Brake Switch
134
STARTING AND OPERATING
Disengaging The Electric Park
Brake Manually
In order to manually release the park
brake, the ignition should be in the ON
mode. Press the brake pedal, and then
push the switch on the center console
briefly.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the
vehicle, and a slight movement of the
brake pedal may be detected during
disengagement.
After disengaging the electric parking
brake, the BRAKE warning light on the
instrument panel and the light on the
switch will turn off.
If the BRAKE warning light on the
instrument panel remains on with the
electric parking brake disengaged, this
indicates a fault: in this case, contact an
authorized dealer.
Warning!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the park brake is fully
disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the park brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury.
Caution!
Never use gear position PARK (P) instead
of the electric parking brake. Always
engage the electric parking brake when
parking the vehicle to prevent injury or
damage caused by the unexpected
movement of the vehicle.
Electric Park Brake
Operating Modes
The electric park brake may operate as
follows:
"Dynamic Operating Mode": this
mode is activated by pulling the switch
repeatedly while driving.
"Static Engagement and Release
Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the
electric park brake can be activated by
pulling the switch on the center console
once. On the other hand, push the
switch and the brake pedal at the same
time to disengage the brake.
"Drive Away Release" — if equipped:
the electric park brake will automatically
disengage with the driver side seat belt
fastened and the detection of an action
performed by the driver to move the
vehicle (forward gear or reverse gear).
"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is
lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear
selector is not in PARK (P) position and
the driver's intention of leaving the
vehicle is detected, the electric park
brake will automatically engage to hold
the vehicle in safety conditions.
"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle
speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the
electric park brake will automatically
engage when the gear selector is in
PARK (P) position. The light on the
switch located on the center console
switches on together with the BRAKE
warning light on the instrument panel
when the park brake is engaged and
applied to the wheels. Each automatic
park brake engagement can be
cancelled by pressing the switch on the
center console and at the same time
moving the gear selector for the
transmission to position PARK (P).
135
Safe Hold
Safe Hold is a safety function that
automatically engages the electric park
brake in the event of a dangerous
condition for the vehicle.
The electric park brake engages
automatically to prevent vehicle
movement if:
The vehicle speed is below 2 mph
(3 km/h).
A transmission operating mode
different from PARK (P) is activated.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The driver side door is open.
No attempts to apply pressure on the
brake pedal have been detected.
The “Safe Hold” function can be
temporarily disabled by pressing the
switch located on the center console
and the brake pedal at the same time,
with the vehicle stationary and the
driver side door open.
Once disabled, the function will activate
again when the vehicle speed reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is
cycled to STOP and then to ON.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The vehicle can be equipped with an
electronically controlled 8-speed
automatic transmission where gear
shifting automatically takes place,
depending on the vehicle usage
instantaneous parameters (vehicle
speed, grade, and accelerator pedal
position).
The new transmission is an absolute
innovation, as it can match the
Stop/Start system with the traditional
automatic transmissions with built-in
torque converter. For further
information, refer to the “Stop/Start”
section within this chapter.
Manual gear shifting can still occur
thanks to the "sequential mode"
position for the gear selector.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle. As
with all vehicles, you should never exit a
vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the park
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the AVV or ON mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
136
STARTING AND OPERATING
Caution!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Display
The following information is shown on
the dedicated area of the display:
In Automatic Mode: the active
mode (P, R, N, D) and with "D" the
current gear number.
In Manual Drive Mode
(Sequential): the mode (M), the current
gear and the double or single gear shift
request, both up and down (single or
double arrow).
Gear Selector
The gear functioning is controlled by the
gear selector, which can assume the
following positions:
P = PARK
R = REVERSE
N = NEUTRAL
D = DRIVE, (automatic forward
speed)
AutoStick: + manually shift to higher
gear; – manually shift to lower gear
The positions diagram is illustrated on
the top of the gear selector.
The letter corresponding to the mode
selected on the gear selector lights up
and appears on the instrument cluster
display.
To select a mode, move the gear
selector forward or backwards,
together with pressing the brake pedal
and button to engage REVERSE (R).
07076S0001EM
Gear Display
07076S0002EM
Gear Selector Center Console
1 — Gear Selector
2 — PARK (P) Button
137
The gear selector is a joystick style
shifting mechanism which returns to the
center position automatically. It can be
pushed forward twice and rearward
twice, based on the starting condition.
The PARK (P) mode can be
enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK
(P) button.
To transition the vehicle into REVERSE
(R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into
DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R)
mode, it is necessary to move the gear
selector by pushing the gear selector
button.
When using AutoStick, activate it by
moving the gear selector from DRIVE
(D) to the left and then forward toward
the - symbol or backward toward the +
symbol and the gear is changed.
To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from
position NEUTRAL (N) to position
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle
must be moving at a low speed or
stopped, and the brake pedal must also
be pressed.
Note:
DO NOT accelerate while shifting
from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N) to another position.
After selecting a gear, wait a few
seconds before accelerating. This
precaution is particularly important with
engine cold.
Transmission Operating
Modes
PARK (P)
The transmission is locked in this mode.
The engine can be started in this mode.
Note: Never try to engage PARK (P)
mode when the vehicle is moving.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure
this mode is engaged (letter P shown
on the display and gear selector) and
that the park brake is engaged.
When parking on a flat surface, first
engage the PARK (P) mode and then
engage the electric park brake.
When parking uphill, before activating
the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric
park brake. Otherwise, it could be
difficult to engage the (P) mode.
To check that the PARK (P) mode is
actually engaged, make sure (P) is
illuminated on the display and on the
gear selector.
Warning!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle. As
with all vehicles, you should never exit a
vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the park
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
07076S0005EM
Gear Selector
3 — Gear Selector Button
138
STARTING AND OPERATING
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the ON mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Caution!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must push the
ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF
mode to the ON mode, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear
range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
Select this mode only with the vehicle at
a standstill.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is
standing for prolonged periods with the
engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the electric
park brake and shift the transmission
into PARK (P) if you must leave the
vehicle.
Warning!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn
off the ignition to coast down a hill. These
are unsafe practices that limit your
response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
DRIVE (D)
Use this mode in normal driving
conditions.
Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or
REVERSE (R) modes must take place
only after releasing the accelerator
pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and
brake pedal pressed.
This mode ensures automatic
engagement of the most suitable gears
for driving needs and maximum fuel
economy in terms of consumption.
In this position, the transmission shifts
the gears automatically, selecting the
most suitable for forward driving among
those available as you go. In this way
the vehicle's optimal driving
characteristics are provided for all
conditions.
AutoStick
In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for
sport driving, when the vehicle is driven
with a heavy load, on slopes, when
towing heavy trailers), it is
recommended to use the Autostick
(sequential shifting) mode to select and
keep a lower fixed ratio.
In these conditions, the use of a lower
gear improves vehicle performance,
preventing overheating.
It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D)
mode to sequential mode regardless of
vehicle speed.
Activation
Starting from DRIVE (D), move the
selector to the left (– and + indication of
the trim) to activate the sequential drive
mode. The gear engaged will be shown
on the display.
139
Shifting is made by moving the gear
selector forwards, towards symbol – or
backwards, towards symbol +.
Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If
Equipped
The gear can also be manually shifted
by using the paddles behind the
steering wheel. Pull the right paddle (+)
toward the steering wheel and release it
to engage a higher gear, and perform
the same operation with the left paddle
(-) to engage a lower gear.
Note: If only one manual shift is
necessary, the letter (D) will remain on
the display with the engaged gear next
to it.
Deactivation
To deactivate the sequential driving
mode, bring the gear selector back in
position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving
mode).
Warning!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
Note:
To select the correct gear for
maximum deceleration (engine brake),
just keep the gear paddle pulled (–):
the transmission goes to an operating
mode in which the vehicle can slow
down easily.
The vehicle will keep the gear
selected by the driver until the safety
conditions allow it.
This means, for example, that the
system will try to prevent the engine
from switching off, automatically
downshifting if the engine speed is too
low.
Automatic Transmission
Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If
a condition is detected that could result
in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated.
In this condition, the transmission stays
in fourth gear, regardless of the selected
gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)
and NEUTRAL (N) still work.
The
symbol might light up in the
instrument cluster.
Temporary failure
In the event of a momentary problem,
the transmission can be reset to regain
all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P),
if possible. If not, shift the transmission
to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition until the
engine turns OFF.
4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then
restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range. If
the problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
Note: Even if the transmission can be
reset, we recommend that you visit your
authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could reoccur.
If the transmission cannot be reset,
service is required at your authorized
dealer.
07076S0006EM
Steering Wheel Shift Paddles
140
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system
(BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.
This system prevents you from moving
the gear selector from position PARK
(P) unless the brakes are applied.
To shift the transmission out of PARK
(P), the ignition must be cycled to the
AVV mode (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
Disabling
Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing
the vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing
systems) inhibit the automatic activation
of PARK (P) mode when stopping the
engine, or proceed as described below:
1. Vehicle at a standstill.
2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated.
3. Push the ignition button for at least
three seconds.
The automatic park brake engagement
function when the engine is stopped
can also be deactivated on the
Information and Entertainment system
by selecting the following functions on
the main menu: "Settings", "Driver
Assistance" and "Automatic Parking
Brake".
Important Notes
Failure to comply with what is reported
below may damage the transmission:
Shift into PARK (P) mode only with
the vehicle at a standstill.
Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass
from REVERSE to another mode only
with the vehicle at a standstill and
engine idling.
Do not change between PARK (P),
REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE
(D) modes with engine running at a
speed above idling.
Before activating any transmission
operating mode, fully depress the brake
pedal.
Note: The unexpected movement of
the vehicle can injure the occupants or
people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle
with engine running: before getting out
of the passenger compartment always
engage the electric park brake, select
the PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle. As
with all vehicles, you should never exit a
vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the park
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the AVV or ON mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
141
Caution!
Only engage the gear with engine at
idling while fully depressing the brake
pedal. If the transmission temperature
exceeds the normal operating limits, the
transmission control unit may change the
gear engagement order and reduce the
drive torque. If the transmission overheats,
it could operate incorrectly until it cools
down.
When using the vehicle with extremely
low external temperatures, the transmission
operation may change depending on the
engine and transmission temperature, as
well as vehicle speed. Activation of the
torque converter clutch and of the eighth
gear is inhibited until the transmission oil is
correctly warmed up. Complete operation
of the transmission will be enabled as soon
as the fluid temperature reaches the
predefined value.
ALFA DNA PRO
SELECTOR
Alfa DNA Pro System
This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa
DNA Pro system selector (located on
the center console). There are four
modes of operation to be selected
according to driving style and road
conditions:
d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).
n = Natural (mode for driving in
normal conditions).
a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving
mode for maximum fuel savings).
RACE = track race driving mode.
= Adjusts the calibration of the
active suspension (if equipped).
Unlike the other modes, the RACE
position does not latch; therefore, by
rotating the selector to RACE, it will
return to its initial position "d".
The symbol of the active mode lights up
in red on the selector.
On the instrument panel display, the
different modes are characterized by
different colors:
Natural - Blue
Dynamic - Red
Advanced Efficiency - Green
RACE - Yellow
Each driving mode is graphically
different in frame color and contents of
each individual "performance" screen.
07076S0004EM
Alfa DNA Pro System Selector
07076S0003EM
Mode Display
142
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Modes
"Natural" Mode
“Natural” Mode is characterized by
reduced engine performance and ECO
shifting strategy for the automatic
transmission.
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "n", the displays light up in
blue.
The "Performance" screen graphically
reproduces some parameters closely
linked to the efficiency of the driving
style, with a view to limiting
consumption.
"Dynamic" Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "d", the displays light up in
red.
ESC and ASR systems: intervention
thresholds that ensure more enjoyable,
sportier driving while guaranteeing the
stability of the car.
Engine and transmission: adoption of
sports mapping.
Warning!
In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal increases considerably.
Consequently, driving is less fluid and
comfortable.
07116S0002EM
Natural Mode
07116S0001EM
Natural Mode Performance Display
07116S0003EM
Dynamic Mode
07116S0006EM
Dynamic Mode Performance
Display
The "Performance" screen displays
parameters related to vehicle stability,
the graphs illustrate the trend of the
longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering
gravity acceleration as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed
on the right.
143
"Advanced Efficiency" Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "a", the displays light up in
green.
ESC and ASR systems: intervention
thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum
safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is
advisable to select "Advanced
Efficiency" mode in the presence of
low-grip road surfaces.
Engine and transmission: standard
response.
The "Performance" screen graphically
displays some parameters closely
related to the vehicle consumption.
“RACE” Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
position "RACE", the displays light up in
yellow.
Engine and transmission: adoption of
sports mapping.
Warning!
It is recommended to activate this mode
at the track.
In "RACE", the sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal increases considerably.
Consequently, driving is less fluid and
comfortable.
The "Performance" screen displays
parameters related to vehicle stability,
the graphs illustrate the trend of the
longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering
gravity acceleration as a reference unit.
The screen displays the lateral and
longitudinal acceleration peaks.
07116S0005EM
Advanced Efficiency Mode
07116S0008EM
Advanced Efficiency Mode
Performance Display
07116S0004EM
RACE Mode
05036S0014EM
RACE Mode Performance Display
144
STARTING AND OPERATING
Note: If the brake system overheats,
this is communicated by the Information
and Entertainment system. In this case,
allow the system to cool for a few
minutes by driving the vehicle normally
without operating the brakes.
Driving Mode Deactivation
To deactivate any driving mode, simply
move the selector to any other mode.
Note:
When the engine is next started, the
"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and
"Natural" mode selected previously is
retained. The system will reactivate in
"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or
"Natural" mode, depending on which
mode was selected before the engine
was stopped.
When the engine is next started, the
"RACE" mode selected previously is
not retained. The system will reactivate
in "Dynamic" mode.
It is not possible to go directly from
"Dynamic" mode to "Advanced
Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You
must always activate the “Natural”
mode first and then select the other
mode.
ALFA ACTIVE
SUSPENSION (AAS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle's electronic suspension
management system is aimed at
optimizing the vehicle's performance.
The system continuously monitors the
damping of the suspension through the
actuator installed on each shock
absorber. The calibration of the shock
absorbers can be adjusted to the
conditions of the road surface and to
the dynamic conditions of the vehicle,
improving its comfort and road
handling.
The driver can choose, even while
driving, (only in "d" or "RACE" mode),
between two types of suspension
calibration: a more sporty ride or a
more comfortable one.
By pushing the button, the system will
work with the shock absorber
calibration which favors driving comfort.
If the system fails, the following symbol
will appear in the instrument cluster
display
.
04306S0001EM
Alfa Active Suspension Button
145
STOP/START
SYSTEM
Stop/Start System
The Stop/Start system automatically
shuts off the engine during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
The function was developed to increase
vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel
consumption, gas emissions, and
sound pollution.
Operating Mode
Stopping the Engine
With vehicle at a standstill and brake
pedal pressed, the engine switches off
if the gear selector is in a position other
than REVERSE (R).
The system does not operate when the
gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in
order to making parking maneuvers
easier.
In the event of stops uphill, engine
switching off is disabled to make the
"Hill Start Assist" function available
(works only with running engine).
NOTE: The engine can only be
automatically stopped after having run
at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an
automatic restart, the vehicle only
needs to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph
(0.5 km/h) to stop the engine.
Engine stopping is signaled by the
symbol lighting up on the instrument
cluster display.
Restarting the Engine
To restart the engine, release the brake
pedal.
With brake pressed, if the gear selector
is in automatic mode - DRIVE (D) - the
engine can be restarted by moving the
gear selector to REVERSE (R) or
NEUTRAL (N) or "AutoStick".
With brake pressed, if the gear selector
is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine can
be restarted by moving the gear
selector to "+" or "–", or REVERSE (R)
or NEUTRAL (N).
When the engine has been stopped
automatically, keeping the brake pedal
pressed, the brake can be released
keeping the engine off by quickly
shifting the gear selector to PARK (P).
To restart the engine, just move the
gear selector out of a position other
than PARK (P).
System Manual
Activation/Deactivation
To manually activate/deactivate the
system, push the button located in the
control panel on the left of the steering
wheel.
System Activation
The activation of the system is indicated
by the
symbol lighting up on the
display. In this condition, the light on the
buttonisoff.
System Deactivation
A message will appear on the display
when the system is deactivated. In this
condition, the light on the button is on.
Note: Each time the engine is started,
the system is activated regardless of
where was when it was previously
switched off.
07126S0051EM
Stop/Start Button
146
STARTING AND OPERATING
Possible Reasons The
Engine Does Not
Autostop
For higher comfort and increased
safety, and to reduce emissions, there
are certain conditions where the engine
will not autostop despite the system
being active, such as:
Engine still cold.
Especially cold outside temperature.
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Driver's door not shut.
Driver's seat belt not fastened.
Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for
parking maneuvers).
With the automatic climate control
active, an adequate cabin heating or
cooling comfort has not been reached
or with MAX-DEF function active.
During the first period of use, to
initialize the system.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Engine Restarting
Conditions
Due to comfort, emission control and
safety reasons, the engine can restart
automatically without any action by the
driver, under special conditions, such
as:
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Reduced braking system vacuum
(e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed
repeatedly).
Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on
roads with a grade).
Engine stopping by the Stop/Start
system for more than approx. three
minutes.
With the automatic climate control
active, an adjustment in cabin heating
or cooling is made or with MAX-DEF
function active.
Safety Functions
When the engine is stopped through
the Stop/Start system, if the driver
releases their seat belt, opens the
driver's or passenger's door, or opens
the hood from inside the vehicle, the
engine can be restarted only by using
the ignition.
This condition is indicated to the driver
both through a buzzer and a message
on the instrument cluster display.
Irregular Operation
In the event of malfunction, the
Stop/Start system is deactivated.
For failure indications, see the "Warning
Lights and Messages" paragraph,
"Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel" chapter.
Vehicle Inactivity
In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the
battery is replaced), special attention
must be paid to the disconnection of
the battery power supply.
Proceed as follows:
Remove connector from socket to
disconnect sensor (battery status
monitoring) installed on the negative
pole of the battery. This sensor should
never be disconnected from the pole
except if the battery is replaced.
Note: After setting the ignition to STOP
and having closed the driver side door,
wait at least one minute before
disconnecting the electrical supply from
the battery. When reconnecting the
electrical supply to the battery, make
sure that the ignition is in the STOP
mode and the driver side door is
closed.
07126S0002EM
Battery Power Supply
1 — Socket
2 — Sensor
3 — Connector
147
SPEED LIMITER
Description
This feature allows the speed of the
vehicle to be limited to speeds, which
can be set by the driver.
The maximum speed can be set with
the vehicle stationary or in motion. The
minimum speed that can be set is
18 mph (30mk/h).
When this feature is active, the vehicle
speed depends on the pressing of the
accelerator pedal until the programmed
speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit
Programming" paragraph).
Activating The Device
The feature can be activated/
deactivated through the Information
and Entertainment System.
Activating The Device
To access this feature on the main
menu, select the following items in
sequence: "Settings", "Safety", “Speed
Limiter” and “on”.
The activation of this feature is signaled
by the displaying of the green symbol
along with the last speed set. The
Speed Limiter feature can remain active
concurrently with the Speed Control
system. If a speed limit below the one
indicated in the Speed Control is
selected, the Speed Control speed will
be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.
This function remains available in RACE
mode.
Speed Limit
Programming
The speed limit can be programmed
through the Information and
Entertainment System.
To access the function on the main
menu, select the following items in
sequence: "Settings", "Safety" and
"Speed Limiter Set Speed".
By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed
increases by 3 mph (5 km/h), from a
minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a
maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).
Exceeding The
Programmed Speed
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal,
the programmed speed can be
exceeded even with the device active
(e.g. in the event of overtaking).
The device is disabled until the speed
drops below the set limit, after which it
reactivates automatically.
Programmed Speed
Icon Flashing
The programmed speed will flash in the
following scenarios:
When the accelerator pedal has been
fully pressed and the vehicle has
exceeded the programmed speed.
Activating the system after setting a
limit below the effective speed of the
vehicle.
In the event of overtake acceleration.
Deactivating The Device
The feature can be activated/
deactivated through the Information
and Entertainment System.
Deactivating The Device
To access this feature on the main
menu, select the following items in
sequence: "Settings", "Safety", “Speed
Limiter” and “OFF”.
Automatic Deactivation Of The
Device
The device deactivates automatically in
the event of fault in the system. In this
case, contact an authorized dealer.
Temporary Signal Loss
When the devices loses the signal, the
white symbol without the speed
indication illuminates on the display.
System Failure
If there is a system failure, the amber
symbol
illuminates on the display.
07136S0001EM
Speed Limiter Display
148
STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC SPEED
CONTROL (CRUISE
CONTROL)
Electronic Speed
Control Description
This is an electronically controlled
driving assistance feature that allows
the desired vehicle speed to be
maintained, without having to press the
accelerator pedal. This feature can be
used at a speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h) on long stretches of dry,
straight roads with few variations
(highways).
The speed control buttons are located
on the left side of the steering wheel.
Note:
To ensure correct operation, the
speedcontrolisdesignedto
deactivate if more than one function is
operated simultaneously. In this case,
the system can be reactivated by
pushing the on/off button
and
setting the desired speed.
It is not recommended to use this
feature in city traffic.
While driving downhill, the system could
brake the vehicle to keep the set speed
the same.
Warning!
Speed Control can be dangerous where
the system cannot maintain a constant
speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for
the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Activating
To activate the Electronic Speed
Control System, push the on/off button
location on the left side of the steering
wheel.
The activation of the system is signaled
by the white warning light
switching
on the instrument cluster.
The Electronic Speed Control function
can remain active at the same time as
the Speed Limiter System. If a speed
limit below the one indicated in the set
speed control, the speed control speed
will be lowered to that of the Speed
Limiter.
This function remains available in RACE
mode.
Note: The system cannot be engaged
in FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is
advisable to engage it in THIRD gear or
higher if using the Autostick feature.
Warning!
Leaving the Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave
the system OFF when you are not using it.
Setting The Desired
Speed
To set a desired speed, proceed as
follows:
1. Turn the Electronic Speed Control
on.
2. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, push the SET switch up
or down and release to activate. When
the accelerator is released, the vehicle
will keep the selected speed
automatically.
07146S0001EM
Electronic Speed Control On/Off
Switch
149
If needed (when overtaking for
instance), you can accelerate beyond
the set speed by pressing the
accelerator. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle goes back to the
previously set speed.
When traveling downhill with the system
active, the vehicle speed may slightly
exceed the set one.
Note: Before pushing the SET switch,
the vehicle must be traveling at a
constant speed on a flat surface.
Increasing/Decreasing
Speed
Increasing Speed
Once the Electronic Speed Control has
been activated, the speed can be
increased by pushing the SET switch
upward.
By keeping the button pushed, the set
speed will increase until the button is
released. The new speed will then be set.
At every movement of the SET switch,
the set speed can be adjusted.
Decreasing Speed
When the feature is active, to reduce
the speed, push the SET switch
downward.
By keeping the button pushed, the set
speed will decrease until the button is
released. The new speed will then be
set.
At every movement of the SET switch,
the set speed can be adjusted.
Note: Moving the SET switch allows to
adjust the speed according to the
selected unit of measurement set on
the Information and Entertainment
System (see dedicated supplement).
Accelerating When Overtaking
Press the accelerator as you would
normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes
The feature can automatically downshift
to keep the set speed when driving on
hilly routes.
On steep grades, the loss or gain in
speed may be considerable and is
advisable to deactivate the Electronic
Speed Control.
Note: The feature keeps the speed set
even uphill and downhill. A slight
variation in the speed on slight rises is
completely normal.
Recalling The Speed
Note: Before returning to the
previously set speed, you must
accelerate to a speed close to that
speed, then push the RES button and
release it.
While in DRIVE (D), push and release
the RES button to recall the previously
set speed.
In Autostick (sequential) mode, before
recalling the previously set speed, you
should accelerate until you are close to
that speed. Then, push and release the
RES button.
07146S0002EM
Set Switch Location
07146S0003EM
Resume Button Location
150
STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating
Lightly pressing the brake pedal
deactivates the speed control without
deleting the set speed.
The speed control may also be
deactivated by applying the electric
park brake or when the braking system
is operated (e.g. operation of the ESC
system).
The set speed is deleted in the
following cases:
Pushing the on/off button twice.
The ignition is cycled to the STOP
position
If there is a malfunction with the
Electronic Speed Control.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
System Description
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
driver assist system that combines the
speed control functions for controlling
the distance from the vehicle ahead.
The system allows to set and hold the
vehicle at the desired speed without
needing to press the accelerator. It also
allows to set and hold a distance from
the vehicle ahead (these settings are set
by the driver).
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses
a radar sensor located behind the front
bumper and a camera located in the
center/upper part of the windshield, to
detect the presence of a vehicle close
ahead.
This system enhances driving comfort
while on the highway or out of town
with light traffic.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead, the system will maintain a fixed
set speed.
If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
the device automatically intervenes by
braking (or accelerating) slightly in order
not to exceed the original set speed, so
that the vehicle keeps the preset
distance, seeking to adapt to the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
Note: Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is not guaranteed under
the following circumstances, and it is
recommended to turn the system off
when:
Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow
Driving in heavy traffic or
construction zones
06016S0003EM
Front Bumper Radar Location
06016S0004EM
Windshield Camera Location
151
Driving on icy, snowy, slippery
roads, roads with steep climbs and
descents, or roads with numerous
turns and bends
Entering a turn lane
Towing a trailer
When circumstances do not allow
safe driving at a constant speed
Warning!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute
for active driving involvement. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects
(e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the
stop position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within 3 minutes the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be canceled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
Activation/Deactivation
The system has four operating states:
Enabled (speed not set)
Activated (speed set)
Paused
Deactivated
Enabling/Activating
To enable the system, push and release
the
button located on the left side on
the steering wheel.
When the system is enabled and ready
to operate, the display shows the white
icon above dashes in place of the
speed.
Setting a speed activates the system.
The display shows the icon in green
with the set speed.
Note: The system cannot be enabled
when RACE mode is active.
07146S0010EM
On/Off Button
07146S0016EM
Enabled Icons
152
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous.
You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are
not using it.
Pausing/Deactivating
With the feature enabled (speed not
set), push the
button to disable.
With the feature active (speed set),
push the
button to pause. The
display will show the icon in white with
the speed in brackets. To deactivate the
feature, push the
button a second
time.
Setting The Desired
Speed
The speed can be set from a minimum
of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of
110 mph (180 km/h).
When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, push the SET switch upward or
downward and release it to activate the
system. When the accelerator is
released, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed automatically.
While the accelerator pedal is pressed,
the system will not be able to control
the distance between the vehicle and
the one ahead. In this case, the speed
will be determined only by the position
of the accelerator pedal.
The system will return to normal
operation as soon as the accelerator
pedal is released.
The system cannot be set:
When pressing the brake pedal.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the electric park brake has
been operated.
When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R)
or NEUTRAL (N) is engaged
When the engine rpm is above a
maximum threshold.
When the vehicle speed is not within
the operational speed range.
When the ESC (or ABS or other
stability control systems) are operating
or have just operated.
When the ESC system is off.
When the Forward Collision Warning
system (if equipped) is braking
automatically.
In the event of system failure.
When the engine is OFF.
In case of obstruction of the radar
sensor (in this case the bumper area
where it is located must be cleaned).
If the system is set, the conditions
described above also cause a
cancellation or deactivation of the
system. These situations may vary
according to the conditions.
Note: The system will not be
deactivated when speeds higher than
those set are reached by pressing the
accelerator pedal above 110 mph
(180 km/h). In these situations, the
system may not work correctly and it is
recommended to deactivate it.
To Vary The Speed
Setting
Increasing Speed
Once the system has been activated,
you can increase the speed by lifting
the SET switch. Each time it is
operated, the speed increases by
1 mph.
07146S0017EM
SET Switch
153
By holding the button up, the set speed
will increase in increments of 5 mph
until the button is released. Then, the
new speed will be set.
Decreasing Speed
Once the system has been activated,
you can decrease the speed by
lowering the SET switch. Each time it is
operated, the speed decreases by
1 mph.
By holding the button down, the set
speed will decrease in increments of
5 mph until the button is released.
Then, the new speed will be set.
Note:
Moving the SET switch allows you
to adjust the speed according to the
selected unit of measurement ("US" or
"metric") set on the Information and
Entertainment System (see dedicated
supplement)
When the unit of measurement is
set to metric, holding the SET switch
the speed will change in 10 km/h
increments
By keeping the accelerator pedal
depressed, the vehicle can continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. In
this case, use the SET switch to set
the speed to the vehicle’s current
speed
When you push the SET button to
reduce the speed, the braking system
intervenes automatically if the engine
brake does not slow the vehicle down
sufficiently to reach the set speed. The
device holds the set speed uphill and
downhill; however a slight variation is
entirely normal, particularly on slight
inclines
The transmission could change to a
lower gear when driving downhill, or
when accelerating. This is normal and
necessary to maintain the set speed
The system will disable while driving
if the brakes overheat
Accelerating When
Overtaking
When driving with ACC activated and
following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing
the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the
left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
The system detects the direction of
traffic automatically when the vehicle
passes from left-hand traffic to
right-hand traffic. In this case, the
overtaking assist function is only active
when the reference vehicle is overtaken
on the right. The additional acceleration
is deactivated when the driver uses the
right direction indicator and returns to
the original lane.
Resuming The Speed
Once the system has been canceled
but not deactivated, to resume a
previously set speed, simply push the
RES button and remove your foot from
the accelerator to recall it.
The system will be set to the last stored
speed.
Before returning to the previously set
speed, bring the speed close to that
value, then push the RES button and
release it.
07146S0018EM
RES (Resume) Button
154
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
The Resume function should only be used
if traffic and road conditions permit.
Resuming a set speed that is too high or
too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to
accelerate or decelerate too sharply for
safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
Setting The Distance
Between Vehicles
The distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead may be set to one
bar (short), two bars (medium), three
bars (long), or four bars (maximum).
The distances from the vehicle ahead
are proportional to speed.
The interval of time with relation to the
vehicle ahead remains constant and
varies from one second (for the short
distance one-bar setting) to two
seconds (for the maximum distance
four-bar setting).
The set distance is shown on the
display by a dedicated icon.
The setting is four (maximum) the first
time the system is used. After the
distance has been modified by the
driver, the new distance will be stored
also after the system is deactivated and
reactivated.
To Decrease The Distance
Push and release the distance button to
decrease the distance setting. The
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter) every time the button is
pushed.
The set speed is held if there are no
vehicles ahead. Once the shortest
distance has been selected, the next
push of the button will set the
maximum distance.
If a slower vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the vehicle icon on the
display illuminates from grey to white.
The system automatically adjusts the
vehicle’s speed to keep the set
distance, independently of the set
speed.
The vehicle holds the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a
speed higher than the set speed.
The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or
the detection field of the Adaptive
Cruise Control system sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The Adaptive Cruise Control system
is deactivated/paused.
Warning!
The maximum breaking applied by the
system is limited. The driver may apply the
brakes in all cases if needed.
If the system predicts that the braking
level is insufficient to hold the set distance,
either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is
displayed to warn the driver of approaching
the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is
also emitted. In this case, it is advised to
brake immediately as necessary to hold a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
07146S0019EM
Distance Icons
07146S0015EM
Distance Button
155
The driver is responsible for ensuring
that there are no pedestrians, other
vehicles or objectives along the direction of
the vehicle. Failure to comply with these
precautions may cause serious accidents
and injuries.
The driver is fully responsible for holding
a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
respecting the highway code in force in the
respective country.
“Stop And Go” Function
The “Stop and Go” operating strategy
allows you to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle
has completely stopped. It will also
restart the vehicle automatically if the
vehicle ahead drives away within two
seconds, otherwise it is necessary to
press the accelerator pedal or push the
RES button to restart.
Warning!
When the ACC system is resumed, the
driver must ensure that there are no
pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path
of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated and the set
speed is canceled if:
The button on the Active Cruise
Control is pushed (with the system
enabled or paused).
The ignition is in STOP mode.
RACE mode is activated.
The system is canceled (the set speed
and distance are stored):
When the system is paused (Refer to
the “Activation / Deactivation” section).
When the conditions shown in the
“Setting The Desired Speed” section
occur.
Limited Operation
Warning
If the dedicated message is shown on
the display, a condition limiting the
Adaptive Cruise Control operation may
have occurred.
This could be due to an obstruction of
the vehicles sensor or camera. It could
also be due to a fault in the system. If
an obstruction is detected, clean the
area of the windshield opposite the
interior rear view mirror, where the
camera is located, as well as the area
of the front bumper where the sensor is
located. Then check that the message
has disappeared.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, normal operation will
resume.
Should the fault persist, contact an
authorized dealer.
Precautions While
Driving
The system may not work correctly in
some driving conditions (see below).
The driver must control the vehicle at all
times.
Vehicle Not Aligned
The system may not detect a vehicle
traveling in the same lane, in the same
direction, but is not aligned. It also may
not detect a vehicle which is cutting in
from a side lane. Sufficient distance
from the vehicles ahead may not be
guaranteed in these cases.
The non-aligned vehicle can weave in
and out of the driving lane causing the
vehicle to brake or accelerate
unexpectedly.
156
STARTING AND OPERATING
Steering And Curves
Driving on curves with the system set
could limit speed and acceleration to
guarantee vehicle stability, even if no
vehicles are detected ahead.
When leaving the curve, the system
resets the previously set speed.
Note:
In cases of narrow curves, the
performance of the system could be
limited. In this case, it is advisable to
deactivate the system.
The system only limits the speed
DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.
Using The System On Slopes
When driving on roads with a variable
incline, the system may not detect the
presence of a vehicle in the lane.
System performance could be limited
according to speed, load, traffic
conditions and steep slopes.
Lane Change
The system may not detect the
presence of a vehicle until it is fully in
your lane.
In this case, sufficient distance from the
vehicle which is changing lanes may not
be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the
utmost attention at all times and be
always ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Small Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles
and motorcycles) traveling near the
outer edges of the lane or which enter
the lane from curb side are not
detected until they are fully in the lane.
Sufficient distance from the vehicles
ahead may not be guaranteed in these
cases.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
The system cannot detect the presence
of stationary vehicles or objects. For
example, the system will not operate if
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a
vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in
that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all
times and be always ready to apply the
brakes if needed.
07146S0011EM
Steering And Curves
07146S0012EM
Lane Change
07146S0013EM
Small Vehicles
157
Objects And Vehicles Moving In
Opposite Or Crosswise Direction
The system cannot detect the presence
of objects or vehicles traveling in
opposite or crosswise directions and
consequently will not activate.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate
on radio frequency that comply with
Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards RSS-
GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PARK SENSORS
SYSTEM
Vehicles With Rear
Sensors Only
The parking sensors, located in the rear
bumper, detect obstacles while the
vehicle is in REVERSE. When an
obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert
will sound and visual indications will be
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Engagement/Disengagement
To turn the system off, push the Park
Sensors System button located to the
left of the headlight switch. The
indicator light within the button will
illuminate when the system is turned
off. Pushing the button a second time
will turn the system back on, and the
indicator light will turn off.
07146S0014EM
Objects And Vehicles Moving In
Opposite Or Crosswise Direction
07176S0001EM
Rear Sensor Location
158
STARTING AND OPERATING
The indicator light within the Park
Sensors System switch will also be on
in case of system failure. If the switch is
pushed with a system failure, the
indicator light will flash for
approximately five seconds. The light
will then stay on constantly.
Note: When the ignition is cycled to
ON, the Park Sensors System keeps
the last state when the engine was
stopped (activated or deactivated) in its
memory.
System Activation/Deactivation
The system, when engaged, is
automatically activated by engaging the
REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by
engaging another gear.
Acoustic Signal
When REVERSE is engaged and there
is an obstacle behind the vehicle, an
acoustic signal with variable frequency
will sound.
The acoustic signal increases in
frequency as the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle decreases.
The acoustic signal becomes
continuous when the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the
distance increases.
The acoustic signal is constant if the
distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is unchanged.
Note: If several obstacles are detected
by the sensors, only the nearest one is
considered.
Indication On Display
The driver can select the type of
warning they would like to be displayed
through the Information and
Entertainment System. To access the
function on the main menu, select in the
following order:
1. “Settings”
2. “Driver Assistance”
3. “ParkSense”
4. “Mode”
5. “Sound-Display”
Visual Indications
The system indicates the presence of
an obstacle by displaying a single red
arc in the detected area, in relation to
the distance of the object and the
position of the vehicle.
If the obstacle is detected in the rear
central area, a single red arc will be
displayed as the obstacle approaches,
first constant, then flashing, in addition
to an acoustic signal.
If the obstacle is detected in the rear left
and/or right area, a single red flashing
arc will be shown in the corresponding
area on the display and the system will
emit an acoustic signal, either at
frequent intervals or constantly.
In general, the vehicle is closer to the
obstacle when a single red flashing arc
is shown on the display and the
acoustic signal becomes continuous.
If several obstacles are detected
simultaneously in the rear area, the
display will show all of them, regardless
of the area in which they were detected.
It is not possible to exit from the display
screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Fault Indication
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be
indicated when REVERSE is engaged
by a message on the instrument cluster
display. Refer to "Warning Lights And
Messages" in "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel" for further
information.
07176S0052EM
Park Sensors System On/Off Switch
159
Messages On The Display
In case of system failure, a dedicated
message appears on the instrument
cluster for about five seconds.
Cleaning The Front Sensors:Ifthe
display shows a message requiring the
sensors to be cleaned, make sure that
the outer surface and the underside of
the rear bumper is free of debris (e.g.
snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas
are clear, cycle the ignition to the STOP
position. Then, return it to ON position.
If the message is still displayed, contact
an authorized dealer.
Audio System Not Available:Ifthe
display shows a message that the
audio system is not available, it means
that the acoustic signal will be emitted
by the instrument panel, and not
through the vehicles speakers.
Note: Some conditions may influence
the performance of the Park Sensors
System:
Reduced sensor sensitivity could
be due to the presence of ice, snow,
mud, or thick paint on the surface of
the sensor.
The sensors may detect a false
obstacle (echo interference) due to
mechanical interference, for example
when washing the vehicle or in
extreme weather.
The signals sent by the sensors can
be altered by the presence of
ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic
brake systems of trucks or pneumatic
drills) near the vehicle.
System performance can be
influenced by the position of the
sensors. For example, due to a change
in the ride setting (caused by wear to
the shock absorbers or suspension),
by changing tires, overloading the
vehicle or operations that require the
vehicle to be lowered.
Be sure not to place bumper
stickers or other adhesives over the
sensors as this will affect system
performance.
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Parking Sensor
system. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
The Parking Sensor system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close
proximity
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the Parking Sensor system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Parking Sensor system.
Vehicles With Front And
Rear Sensors
The parking sensors, located in the
front and rear bumpers, detect the
presence of any obstacles and warn
the driver through an acoustic signal
and visual indications will be displayed
on the instrument cluster.
160
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engagement/Disengagement
To turn the system off, push the Park
Sensors System switch located to the
left of the headlight switch. The
indicator light within the switch will
illuminate when the system is turned
off. Pushing the switch a second time
will turn the system back on, and the
indicator light will turn off.
The indicator light within the Park
Sensors System switch will also be on
in case of system failure. If the switch is
pushed with a system failure, the
indicator light will flash for
approximately five seconds. The light
will then stay on constantly.
Note: When the ignition is cycled to
ON the Park Sensors system keeps the
last state when the engine was stopped
(activated or deactivated) in its memory.
System Activation/Deactivation
When the REVERSE gear is engaged
and the system is on, the front and rear
sensors are activated. If the vehicle
moves from REVERSE to a forward
gear, the rear sensors are deactivated,
while the front sensors remain active
until the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is
exceeded.
Note: In certain operating conditions,
the system could start detecting an
obstacle only after the vehicle has
moved slightly (a few inches).
Acoustic Signal
In the presence of an obstacle at the
front or the rear of the vehicle, an
acoustic signal with variable frequency
will sound:
The acoustic signal increases in
frequency as the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle decreases.
The acoustic signal becomes
continuous when the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
11 in (30 cm), and stops if the distance
increases.
The acoustic signal is constant if the
distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is unchanged.
Note: If the sensors detect several
front and rear obstacles, the closest
obstacle is considered. An intermittent
signal will sound if the obstacles are at
the same distance (front and rear).
When the system emits an acoustic
signal, the volume of the Information
and Entertainment System, if activated,
is automatically lowered.
Indication On Display
The driver can select the type of
warning they would like to be displayed
through the Information and
Entertainment System. To access the
function on the main menu, select in the
following order:
1. “Settings”
2. “Driver assistance”
3. “ParkSense”
4. “Mode”
5. “Sound-Display”
07176S0003EM
Front Sensor Location
07176S0001EM
Rear Sensor Location
161
Visual Indications
The system indicates the presence of
an obstacle by displaying a single red
arc in the detected areas, in relation to
the distance of the object and the
position of the vehicle.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or
rear central area, a single red arc will be
displayed as the obstacle approaches,
first constant, then flashing, in addition
to an acoustic signal.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or
rear left and/or right area, a single red
flashing arc will be shown in the
corresponding area on the display and
the system will emit an acoustic signal,
either at frequent intervals or constantly.
If several obstacles are detected
simultaneously in the front and rear
area, the display will show all of them,
regardless of the area in which they
were detected.
In general, the vehicle is closer to the
obstacle when a single or several
flashing arcs are shown on the display
and the acoustic signal becomes
continuous.
It is not possible to exit from the display
screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Fault Indication
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be
indicated by a message on the display
on the instrument cluster. Refer to
"Warning Lights And Messages" in
"Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel" for further information.
Messages On The Display
In case of system failure, a dedicated
message appears on the instrument
cluster for about five seconds.
Cleaning the front or rear
sensors: If the display shows a
message requiring the sensors to be
cleaned, make sure that the outer
surface and the underside of the front
and rear bumpers are free of debris
(e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these
areas are clear, place the ignition in
STOP mode. Then, return it to ON
mode. If the message is still displayed,
contact an authorized dealer.
Audio system not available:Ifthe
display shows a message that the
audio system is not available, it means
that the acoustic signal will be emitted
by the instrument panel, and not
through the vehicles speakers.
Note: Some conditions may influence
the performance of the Park Sensors
System:
Reduced sensor sensitivity could
be due to the presence of ice, snow,
mud, or thick paint on the surface of
the sensor.
The sensors may detect a false
obstacle (echo interference) due to
mechanical interference, for example
when washing the vehicle or in
extreme weather.
The signals sent by the sensors can
be altered by the presence of
ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic
brake systems of trucks or pneumatic
drills) near the vehicle.
System performance can be
influenced by the position of the
sensors. For example, due to a change
in the ride setting (caused by wear to
the shock absorbers or suspension),
by changing tires, overloading the
vehicle or operations that require the
vehicle to be lowered.
Be sure not to place bumper
stickers or other adhesives over the
sensors as this will affect system
performance.
162
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Parking Sensor
system. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
The Parking Sensor system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close
proximity
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the Parking Sensor system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Parking Sensor system.
LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM
Description
The Lane Departure Warning system
uses a forward looking camera located
on the windshield to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When one or both lane limits are
detected and the vehicle passes over
one without the an activated turn signal,
the system emits a visual as well as an
acoustic signal.
If the vehicle continues to go beyond
the line of the lane without any
intervention from the driver, the
surpassed line will light up on the
display (left or right) to urge the driver to
bring the vehicle back into the limits of
the lane.
Caution!
Do not tamper with nor operate on the
camera. Do not close the openings in the
aesthetic cover located under the interior
rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of
the camera, contact an authorized dealer.
The camera may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such
as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,
formation of ice layers on the windshield.
Camera operation may also be
compromised by the presence of dust,
condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,
by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are
driving not aligned with yours, vehicle
driving in a transverse or opposite way on
the same lane, bend with a small radius of
curvature), by road surface conditions and
by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).
Make sure the windshield is always clean.
Use specific detergents and clean cloths to
avoid scratching the windshield. The
camera operation may also be limited or
absent in some driving, traffic and road
surface conditions.
If the windshield must be replaced due
to scratches, chipping or breakage,
contact exclusively an authorized dealer.
Do not replace the windshield on your own.
It is advisable to replace the windshield if it
is damaged in the area of the camera.
163
System Activation/
Deactivation
The system is activated/deactivated by
pushing the button located on the end
of the multifunction lever.
Note: When the engine is started, the
system maintains the operating mode
that was selected when it was tur ned
OFF.
Activation Conditions
Once turned on, the system becomes
active only if the following conditions
are met:
The vehicle speed is above 37 mph
(60 km/h).
The lane limit lines are visible at least
on one side.
There are suitable visibility conditions.
The road is straight or with wide
radius bends.
A suitable distance is kept from the
vehicle in front.
The turn signal is not active.
Symbols And Messages
On The Display
The Lane Departure Warning system
advises the driver when the vehicle
leaves the driving lane by showing
symbols and messages on the
instrument cluster display.
When the system is active and the lane
limits have not been detected, the
display shows a grey vehicle icon with
two grey lines
Exiting a lane with detection of a
single limit
When the system is active and only, for
example, the left lane limit has been
detected, the detected lane illuminates
in white on the display; the system is
ready to provide visual warnings on the
display in the event of unintentional
exiting of the lane (turn signal not
activated) to the left.
07226S0001EM
Lane Departure Warning System
Activation/Deactivation Button
07226S0002EM
Vehicle Changing Lanes
07226S0007EM
Lane Limits Not Detected
07226S0003EM
Left Lane Limit Detected
164
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the system detects that the
vehicle has approached the lane line
and is about to pass it, the left line on
the display illuminates in yellow.
The system operates in the same way,
but mirrored, in the event of exiting the
right lane when only the right lane limit
has been detected.
Exiting a lane with detection of both
limits
When the system is active, both lane
lines on the display illuminate in white to
indicate the successful detection of
both limits.
When lane limits are detected, the
system is ready to provide indications in
case the driver unintentionally leaves
the lane (turn signal not activated).
As the Lane Departure Warning system
detects the lane limits while the vehicle
is in motion, it will adjust the display
accordingly (from white to yellow and
vice versa, and increase their
thickness).
If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted
by an audible signal as well as the
visual indication in the instrument
cluster. The signal is emitted through
the speakers on the side of the lane
limit which is being crossed (eg. if the
vehicle is exceeding the left line of the
lane, the audible signal will come from
the speakers on the left of the vehicle).
Changing The System Settings
The system's sensitivity can be set
through the Information and
Entertainment System. Sensitivity
“High” or “Low” can be selected.
To access the function, from the main
menu select the following in order:
1. “Settings”
2. “Safety”
3. “Lane Departure Warning”
4. “Sensitivity”
07226S0004EM
Left Lane Limit Approached
07226S0005EM
Both Lane Limits Detected
07226S0006EM
Right Lane Limit Approached
165
Limited Operation Warning
If a message appears on the display, a
condition limiting the Lane Departure
Warning system operation may have
occurred. This could be an obstruction
of the camera view, or a fault in the
system.
If an obstruction is detected, clean the
area of the windshield by the interior
rear view mirror.
Although the vehicle can still be driven
in normal conditions, the system may
not function properly.
When the conditions limiting the system
are corrected, it will go back to normal
operation. Should a fault persist,
contact an authorized dealer.
System Failure Warning
If the system turns off and
appears
on the display, it means that there is a
system fault.
In this case, it is still possible to drive
the vehicle, but you are advised to
contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA / DYNAMIC
GRIDLINES
Description
The Rear Back-Up Camera is located
just under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above
the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
Information and Entertainment System
display will show the area behind the
vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-up
Camera, along with a warning
message.
Rear Back-Up Camera Features
To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera
features, select “Settings” from the
Main Menu of the Information and
Entertainment System. Under “Driver
Assistance”, Rear Back-Up Camera
features can be selected:
View
Camera Delay
Camera Guidelines
Selecting “View” will activate the
camera view on the display.
Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the
camera view to remain on the display
shortly after the vehicle is no longer in
REVERSE, followed by the previously
active screen.
Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will
activate the display of the dynamic
guidelines that indicate the route of the
vehicle.
07186S0001EM
Rear Back-Up Camera Location
07186S0002EM
Rear Back-Up Camera Display
166
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using the Rear
Back Up Camera to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
the Rear Back Up Camera.
Symbols And Messages
On The Display
Indications On The Display
Through the Information and
Entertainment System settings, by
activating the "Camera Guidelines"
feature, guidelines can be seen on the
rear camera display. If activated, the
guidelines are positioned on the image
to highlight the width of the vehicle and
the expected reverse path based on the
steering wheel position.
A superimposed central line indicates
the center of the vehicle to assist in rear
parking maneuvers. The various colored
areas indicate the distance from the
rear of the vehicle.
The table below shows the approximate
distances for each area:
Area
Distance from the
rear of the vehicle
Red
0–11.8
inches
(0–30
cm)
Yellow
11.8 inches to 3.3 feet
(30 cm–1 m)
Green
3.3 feet or more
(1mormore)
Messages On The Display
If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will
not detect any obstacle behind the
vehicle. The display will show a
dedicated warning message.
Make sure the trunk lid is closed by
pushing next to the lock until it clicks.
Important Notes
Ice, snow or mud on the surface of
the camera may reduce its sensitivity. It
is important to keep the camera surface
clean, and free from debris.
When parking, be aware of obstacles
that may be above or under the camera
range.
167
REFUELING THE
VEHICLE
Refueling The Vehicle
Before refueling, make sure that the fuel
type is correct.
Also, stop the engine before refueling.
Note: An inefficient catalytic converter
leads to harmful exhaust emissions,
thus contributing to air pollution.
Caution!
Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,
even in small amounts in an emergency, as
this would damage the catalytic converter
beyond repair.
Refueling Capacity
To ensure that you fill the tank
completely, top off twice after the first
click of the fuel nozzle.
Further top-off could cause faults in the
fuel feeding system.
Refueling Procedure
The fuel filler door is unlocked when the
central door locking system is
unlocked. It is automatically locked
when the central locking system is
applied.
Opening The Fuel Filler Door
To refuel proceed as follows:
1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on
the point shown by the arrow.
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the
filler pipe.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or
shuts off, before removing the nozzle,
wait for at least 10 seconds in order for
the fuel to flow inside the tank.
5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten
the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that cap
is properly tightened.
The label indicates the fuel type
(UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).
Emergency Fuel Door Opening
In the event of an emergency the fuel
filler door can be opened by operating
from inside the trunk.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the trunk and locate the
emergency fuel filler release cap on the
inside lining.
2. Open the cap, and pull the cord
inside to unlock the fuel filler door.
07206S0001EM
Fuel Door
07206S0002EM
Fuel Door Label
168
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing
on it (see the previous instructions).
Warning!
Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may cause
the MIL to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped
into a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
Note: If the filler compartment is
washed with a pressure washer, keep it
at a distance of at least 8 inches
(20 cm).
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration regulations, your
vehicle has a certification label affixed to
the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year
of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture.
The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible
weight of your vehicle including driver,
passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum
capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as
the allowable load weight a truck can
carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
load on the front and rear axles. The
load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the
lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles
or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased
durability does not necessarily increase
the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification
Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
equal to the load capacity of this tire
size.
169
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate
for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for
your vehicle for all loading conditions up
to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined
as the total weight of the vehicle with all
fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the
vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before
any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight
of the front and rear of your vehicle at
the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be
weighed on a commercial scale to
insure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that
the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle
may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded
but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have
an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Caution!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing is not recommended for
this vehicle.
170
STARTING AND OPERATING
SUGGESTIONS FOR
DRIVING
Saving Fuel
Below are some suggestions which
may help you save fuel and lower the
amount of harmful emissions released
into the atmosphere.
Vehicle Maintenance
Checks and operations should be
carried out in accordance with the
Maintenance Plan. Refer to "Scheduled
Servicing" in "Servicing And
Maintenance" for further information.
Tires
Check the tire pressures at least once
every four weeks: if the pressure is too
low, consumption levels increase as
resistance to rolling is higher.
Unnecessary Loads
Do not travel with an overloaded trunk.
The weight of the vehicle and its
arrangement greatly affect fuel
consumption and stability.
Electric Devices
Use electrical systems only for the
amount of time needed. The rear
window defroster, additional headlights,
windshield wipers and heater blower
fan require a considerable amount of
energy; increasing the current uptake
increases fuel consumption (by up to
+25% when city driving).
Climate Control System
Using the climate control system will
increase consumption: use standard
ventilation when the temperature
outside permits.
Devices for Aerodynamic Control
The use of non-certified devices for
aerodynamic control may adversely
affect air drag and consumption levels.
Driving Style
Starting
Do not warm up the engine at low or
high revs when the vehicle is stationary;
this causes the engine to warm up
more slowly, thereby increasing fuel
consumption and emissions. It is
therefore advisable to drive off
immediately, slowly, avoiding high
speeds: by doing this the engine will
warm up more quickly.
Unnecessary Actions
Avoid revving up when starting at traffic
lights or before stopping the engine.
This action is unnecessary and causes
increased fuel consumption and
pollution.
Gear Selection
Use a high gear when traffic and road
conditions allow it. Using a low gear for
faster acceleration will increase fuel
consumption. Improper use of a high
gear increases consumption, emissions
and engine wear.
Max. Speed
Fuel consumption considerably
increases as speed increases. Maintain
a constant speed, avoiding
unnecessary braking and acceleration,
which cost in terms of both fuel
consumption and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently severely affects
consumption and emissions:
acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum
torque.
Conditions Of Use
Cold Starting
Short trips and frequent cold starts will
not allow the engine to reach optimum
operating temperature. This results in a
significant increase in consumption
levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving)
and emissions.
Traffic And Road Conditions
High fuel consumption is caused by
heavy traffic, for instance when
travelling in traffic with frequent use of
low gears or in cities with many traffic
lights. Winding mountain roads and
rough road surfaces also adversely
affect consumption.
Stops In Traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. railway
crossings) turn off the engine.
171
Transporting
Passengers
Warning!
It is extremely dangerous to leave
children in a parked vehicle when the
temperature outside is very high. The heat
inside the passenger compartment may
have serious, or even fatal, consequences.
Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In
the event of an accident, anyone inside the
trunk would be at greater risk of serious or
even fatal injury.
Ensure that all the occupants of the
vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and
that any children are positioned correctly
on the dedicated child restraint systems.
Transporting Animals
The intervention of the airbags may be
dangerous for an animal on the front
seat. It is therefore advised to arrange
animals on the rear seat inside
dedicated cages restrained by the
vehicle’s seat belts.
Keep in mind that, in the event of a
sudden braking or an accident, an
inadequately restrained animal may be
projected within the passenger
compartment, risking injury to the
animal itself and the other occupants of
the vehicle.
Exhaust Gas
Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,
and may be lethal. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas
which can cause fainting and poisoning
if inhaled.
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide,
take the following measures:
Do not keep the engine running in
closed spaces.
If, for some reason (e.g. transporting
bulky loads), it is necessary to drive
with the trunk open, close all the
windows and run the climate control fan
at maximum speed. DO NOT activate
air recirculation mode.
Should it be necessary to stay in the
stationary vehicle with engine running,
adjust the ventilation/heating system
and operate the fan in such a way that
outside air will enter the passenger
compartment. Activate the maximum
fan speed.
Maintenance of the exhaust system
provides the best protection against
leaks of carbon monoxide into the
passenger compartment.
Should an unusual noise from the
exhaust system or the presence of
exhaust gas in the passenger
compartment be identified, or if the
underbody or rear section of the vehicle
is damaged, have the entire exhaust
system and bodywork areas checked
to identify any components which are
broken, damaged, worn or have moved
from their correct fitting position. If any
of these things occur, contact your
authorized dealer.
Open welding or loose connections
may permit exhaust gas to enter the
passenger compartment.
Check the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change operations. Replace the
components if necessary, contact your
authorized dealer.
Performance
This vehicle is equipped with an engine
capable of delivering exceptionally fast
acceleration and speed:
Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm.
Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at
2500–5000 rpm.
Top speed: 190 mph (307 km/h).
Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to
100 km/h): 3.9 seconds.
For safe driving, it is essential,
particularly during the first days of use,
to get to know the car by driving
carefully and gradually discovering its
performance.
Brakes
The car braking system may be
available with four carbon-ceramic
material brake discs, one on each
wheel.
In order to guarantee the maximum
braking capacity for the first use, Alfa
172
STARTING AND OPERATING
Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure
for discs and pads directly at the
factory.
The use of carbon-ceramic material
brake discs guarantees braking features
(better deceleration/pedal load ratio,
braking distances, fading resistance)
proportional to the dynamic features of
the car in addition to considerably
decreasing the unsprung component
weight.
The materials used and the structural
features of the system could generate
unusual noises which have absolutely
no adverse effect on correct operation
and reliability of the braking system.
Greater pressure may need to be
applied to the brake pedal the first time
to keep the same braking capacities in
presence of condensation or salt on the
braking surfaces, for example after
washing or if the car is not used for a
long time.
Note: Given the high technological
level of this system, any servicing on it
must be performed by your authorized
dealer which exclusively has the skills
needed for the repair operations.
In case of intensive, high-performance
use of the car, have the efficiency of the
carbon-ceramic material braking
system inspected as shown on the
Maintenance Plan at your authorized
dealer.
Driving On Race Tracks
Before driving on a track using a racing
style, it is necessary to:
Attend a race track driving course.
Check the liquid levels in the engine
compartment. For more information,
see the “Checking Levels” section in
the “Servicing And Maintenance”
chapter.
Have the car inspected at your
authorized dealer.
Remember that the car was not
designed to be driven exclusive on the
race track and that this use increases
stress and component wear.
Preheating the carbon ceramic
material brake discs
The brake discs must be warmed up to
make them fully efficient. You are
advised to perform the following
procedure:
Brake nine times from 80 mph to
18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with
deceleration equal to 0.7g (the
longitudinal acceleration value is shown
on the instrument panel display by
setting RACE mode and selecting the
“Performance” page) with 20 second
intervals between brake applications;
keep the car at a speed comprised
between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h
and 100 km/h) and do not brake for
4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool
down;
Then brake three times from
124 mph to 18 mph (200 km/h to
30 km/h) with deceleration equal to
1.1g (ABS operation) with 30 second
intervals between brake applications;
keep the car at a speed comprised
between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h
and 100 km/h) and do not brake for
5 minutes to allow the brakes to cool
down.
173
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?
At times, a problem such as these may
interfere with your driving experience.
The section on emergencies can help
you to deal with critical situations
independently.
In an emergency, we recommend that
you call the phone number found in the
Warranty Book.
You may also consider contacting your
nearest authorized dealer.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .175
BULB REPLACEMENT.........175
FUSES...................180
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .186
JUMPSTARTING............189
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .192
ENGINE OVERHEATING .......192
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .193
TOW EYES ................194
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . .195
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .195
174
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is
located in the switch bank below the
radio screen.
Push the switch once
to turn the hazard
warning flasher on.
When the switch is
activated, all
directional turn signals
will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
Push the switch a second time to turn
the hazard warning flashers off.
This is an emergency warning system
and it should not be used when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to
seek assistance, the hazard warning
flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the
STOP position.
Note: With extended use the hazard
warning flashers may discharge your
battery.
Caution!
Prolonged use of the hazard warning
flashers may discharge the vehicle’s
battery.
BULB
REPLACEMENT
General Instructions
Before replacing a bulb, check the
contacts for oxidation.
Replace blown bulbs with others of
the same type and power.
After replacing a headlight bulb,
always check its alignment.
When a light is not working, check
that the corresponding fuse is intact
before changing the bulb. For the
location of fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this
chapter.
Note: In some particular climate
conditions, such as low temperature,
humidity, or after washing the car, a thin
condensation layer may form on the
internal surfaces of the front and rear
headlights. This condensation will
disappear after switching on the
headlights.
08016S0001EM
Hazard Warning Switch
175
Types Of Bulbs
The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs
Glass Bulbs (Type A): They
are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder,
press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.
Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to
the side and pull it out.
Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): To remove the bulb, contact an
authorized dealer.
176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacement Bulbs
Light bulbs Type Power
Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W
Rear Fog
lights H11 55 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W
Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W
Glove compartment light W5W 4 W
Deck lid light W5W 5 W
Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W
177
Replacing Exterior
Bulbs
Note: Only replace the bulb when the
engine is off. Also ensure that the
engine is cold, to prevent the risk of
burns.
Direction Indicators
To change the bulb of these lights,
proceed as follows:
1. Operating inside the engine
compartment, remove the protective
cover.
2. Remove protective cover.
3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly
counterclockwise, and then slide it off
the headlight body.
4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the
bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder.
6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly
in the housing on the headlight body
and turn it clockwise, making sure that
it is locked correctly.
7. Install the protective cover.
Front Light Cluster with Main Beam
Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights
To replace the bulbs of the main beam
headlights, contact your authorized
dealer.
Caution!
Do not touch the new bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Courtesy Mirror Light
To replace the bulbs, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the
lens, using a suitable tool.
08026S0023EM
Protective Cover Location
08026S0006EM
Protective Cover
08026S0007EM
Bulb/Connector
178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Change the bulb, releasing it from
the side contacts, then insert the new
bulb, making sure that it is correctly
fastened between the contacts.
3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on
one side and then pressing on the other
side until it clicks into place.
Glove Compartment Light
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the courtesy light assembly,
using a suitable tool.
3. Open protective cover up and
remove the bulb pulling out of the
connector.
4. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
5. Close the protective cover on the
lens.
6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first
on one side and then pressing on the
other side until it clicks into place.
Luggage Compartment Courtesy
Lights
To replace the bulbs, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the trunk, and remove the
trunk lamp assembly using a suitable
tool.
2. Open protective cover up and
remove the bulb pulling out of the
connector.
08026S0008EM
Sun Visor
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Lens
08026S0009EM
Courtesy Lamp Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
08026S0010EM
Ceiling Light Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
179
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the
lens.
5. Install trunk lamp in the correct
position, inserting it firstly on one side,
and then pressing on the other side
until it clicks into place.
Puddle Lights On Door Panel
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and remove the
puddle light assembly, using a suitable
tool.
2. Open protective cover up and
remove the bulb pulling out of the
connector.
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the
lens.
5. Install puddle light in the correct
position, inserting it firstly on one side
and then pressing on the other side
until it clicks into place.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems
against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you
must check the electrical circuit inside
of the fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power
outlets for extended periods of time
with the engine off may result in vehicle
battery discharge.
08026S0012EM
Puddle Light Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
2
3
1
0726067916
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical
Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical
Circuit
180
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Fuse Extracting Pliers
To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked
to the fuse box.
Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,
press them, and extract the pliers
pulling upwards.
The pliers have two different ends, both
of which are specifically designed to
remove the different types of fuses
present in the vehicle:
After use, return the pliers to their
proper position by following the below
procedures:
Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs
and insert them into their housing.
Push downward on the pliers into
their housing until they click into place.
Warning!
When replacing a blown fuse, always
use an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or
disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
transmission system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Fuse Location
The fuses, which can be replaced by
the user, are grouped in two boxes
below the passenger side foot board
and inside the trunk.
08036S0002EM
J-CASE Fuse
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical
Circuit
3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-
cuit
08036S0053EM
Fuse Box
08036S0005EM
Fuse Extracting Pliers
1 — MINI fuse
2 — J-CASE fuse
181
Control Unit Under
Passenger Side
Footboard
To access the fuses, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift the upper end of the footboard
on the passenger side, pulling to
release the two buttons.
Release Buttons On Footboard
1 — Footboard
2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove
the panel pulling downward.
Release Hooks On Footboard
2 — Panel
The fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit.
After replacing the fuse, make sure that
panel and footboard are correctly
locked.
Luggage Compartment
Fuse Box
To access the fuses, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.
2. Remove the control unit cover.
The fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit.
The number identifying the electrical
component corresponding to each fuse
is shown on the cover.
After replacing a fuse, make sure that
you have closed cover correctly.
08036S0010EM
08036S0011EM 08036S0014EM
Control Unit
182
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Front power window (driver side) F33 25
Front
power window (passenger side) F34 25
Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control
system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB
port
F36 15
Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors
unlock, Central lock
F38 20
08036S0013EM
Passenger Side Control Unit
183
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Windshield washer pump F43 20
Rear left
power window F47 25
Rear right power window F48 25
Heater rear window coil F94 15
184
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40
Hi-Fi system F8 30
KL15/a
USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5
I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10
KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20
08036S0015EM
Luggage Compartment Control Unit
185
TIRE SERVICE KIT —
IF EQUIPPED
Description
If a tire is punctured, you can make a
first emergency repair using the Tire
Sevice Kit located in the rear storage
area under the load floor.
Note: Vehicles equipped with Run Flat
Tires will not be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit includes:
Sealant cartridge containing the
sealing fluid.
Filler tube.
Adhesive label with the writing "Max.
50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a
position easily visible to the driver (eg.
on the dashboard) after repairing the
tire.
Air compressor, complete with
pressure gauge and connectors.
An instruction pamphlet for reference
in prompt and correct use of the Tire
Service Kit, which must be then given
to the personnel dealing with the
sealant-treated tire.
A pair of protective gloves.
Some adaptors, for inflating different
elements.
Note: The sealing fluid is effective with
external temperatures of between -40°F
(-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealing
fluid has an expiration date.
To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as
follows:
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where
you can repair the tire safely. You
should be as far as possible from the
side of the road, and in a position that
is not dangerous for oncoming traffic.
Engage the hazard warning flashers,
remove the safety triangle from the
luggage compartment, and place it at a
suitable distance from the vehicle to
make other drivers aware of your
presence.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the
wheel with the deflated tire) is in a
position that is near to the ground. This
will allow the tire service kit hoses to
reach the valve stem and keep the tire
repair kit flat on the ground.
3. Shift the gear selector to PARK (P).
4. Apply the electric park brake and
turn the engine OFF.
08066S0001EM
Tire Service Kit Location
08066S0002EM
Tire Service Kit Components
1— Sealant Cartridge
2— Filler Tube
3— Adhesive Label
4— Air Compressor
186
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Inflation Procedure
Warning!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat sources.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward
in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow
the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of
Tire Service Kit to come in contact with
hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit
sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or
absorbed through the skin. It causes skin,
eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is
any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as
follows:
1. Engage the electric park brake.
2. Insert the sealant cartridge
containing the sealing liquid in the
proper compressor holder, pushing
down hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap,
take out the filler tube and tighten the
fitting on the tire valve.
3. Make sure the power switch of the
compressor is in the off position (O).
4. Insert the plug into the power outlet
in the center console, then start the
engine.
08066S0004EM
Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated
Tire
1— Sealant Cartridge
2— Filler Tube
08066S0006EM
Center Console Power Outlet
187
5. Start the compressor by placing the
power switch in the on position (I).
6. Inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire placard, located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge
of the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
more information. In order to obtain a
more precise reading, check the
pressure value on pressure gauge with
the compressor off.
7. If the pressure is not at least
26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes,
disengage the compressor from the
valve and power outlet. Then, move the
vehicle forwards approximately five tire
turns in order to distribute the sealing
fluid inside the tire evenly, and then
repeat the inflation operation.
8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure
of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within
15 minutes from the compressor
switching on, do not drive the vehicle,
and contact an authorized dealer.
9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles
(8 km), stop, engage the electric park
brake, and recheck the tire pressure.
10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi
(1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle,
and see an authorized dealer.
11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi
(1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct
pressure (with engine running and
electric park brake engaged), and drive
immediately with great care to an
authorized dealer.
Warning!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire
is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire
checked as soon as possible at an
authorized dealer.
12. Apply the adhesive label from the
sealant bottle where it can be easily
seen by the driver as a reminder that
the tire has been treated with a Tire
Service Kit, as well as not to exceed the
speed restriction for the treated tire.
Warning!
Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker
to the padded area on the steering wheel.
Adhering the speed restriction sticker to
the padded area on the steering wheel is
dangerous because the air bag may not
operate (deploy) normally resulting in
serious injury. In addition, do not adhere
the sticker to areas where warning lights or
the speedometer cannot be viewed.
08066S0005EM
Air Compressor
5— Power Switch
6— Pressure Gauge
188
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Checking And Restoring
Tire Pressure
The compressor can also be used to
check and, if necessary, restore the tire
pressure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Release the quick connector and
connect it directly to the valve of the tire
to be inflated.
2. Push the air release button.
Sealant Cartridge
Replacement
Note: Only use original cartridges,
which can be purchased at an
authorized dealer.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the sealant cartridge by
pushing the release button located on
the side of the compressor.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by
pushing downward firmly.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery,
it can be jump-started using a set of
jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump-starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
Note: When using a portable battery
booster pack, follow the manufacturer's
operating instructions and precautions.
Warning!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
Caution!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
08066S0008EM
Air Compressor Components
7— Air Release Button
8— Quick Connector
9— Release Button
08066S0009EM
Sealant Cartridge Replacement
1— Sealant Cartridge
9— Release Button
189
Remote Battery
Connection Posts
The negative terminal (-) is positioned
next to the passenger side hood lock.
Warning!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
The positive post (+) can be accessed
by lifting the protective flap.
To carry out the operation, you need to
have the correct cables to connect to
the battery of another vehicle or a
portable battery booster pack to the
remote posts of the discharged battery.
Usually, these cables have terminals at
the ends and are identified by different
sheath colors (red = positive, black =
negative).
Jump Starting
Warning!
Failure to follow this jump-starting
procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
Caution!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Preparation For Jump Starting:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake, and
turn the ignition to the STOP position.
2. Switch off all electrical features in the
vehicle.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start
the battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is in
STOP position.
Warning!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
08076S0006EM
Remote Post Location
08076S0004EM
Protective Flap Opening
08076S0005EM
Remote Post Location
190
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cable Connection
Proceed as follows to perform a jump
starting procedure:
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the vehicle with the discharged battery
2. Connect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable to the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable to a good
engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery (exposed metal part
of the engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
Warning!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that
has the booster battery, let the engine
idle a few minutes, and then start the
engine in the vehicle with the
discharged battery. If using a portable
battery booster pack, before starting
the vehicle, wait a few seconds after
completing the connection.
Cable Disconnection
Once the engine is started, remove the
connection cables in reverse sequence,
as described below:
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper
cable from the engine (-) ground of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of
the jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of
the jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to
start your vehicle, you should have the
battery and charging system inspected
at your authorized dealer.
Caution!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Bump Starting
Never jump start the engine by pushing,
towing or coasting downhill.
Note: You cannot start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission by pushing
it.
Caution!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
191
REFUELING IN
EMERGENCY
Refueling in an emergency is described
in "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting
And Operating".
ENGINE
OVERHEATING
Engine overheating may occur in
situations of extreme environmental
temperatures, frequent engine
stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If
the engine becomes overheated, the
Engine Temperature Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate
along with a dedicated message. Refer
to "Warning Lights And Messages" in
the "Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel" for more information.
In any of the following situations, you
can reduce the potential for overheating
by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place
the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do
not increase engine idle speed.
Note: There are steps that you can
take to slow down an impending
overheat condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on,
turn it off. The A/C system adds heat
to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode
control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to
act as a supplement to the radiator
and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
Warning!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
Caution!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine. Wait until the steam
dissipates. Then, open the hood and
start the engine.
If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is
Escaping
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
Note:
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the engine
temperature will increase. Stop the
engine and contact your authorized
dealer.
If the engine continues to overheat
or frequently overheats, have the
cooling system inspected. The engine
could be seriously damaged unless
repairs are made. Contact your
authorized dealer.
TOWING A
DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for
towing a disabled vehicle using a
commercial towing service.
Caution!
The vehicle should be transported with
all four wheels OFF the ground on the
flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.
Avoid towing with only the front (or rear)
wheels lifted. When towing with only the
front (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition to
damaging the body, it could damage the
transmission.
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remain released, while being
towed.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The operators of the assistance vehicle
must be informed of your vehicle's
minimum required height from the
ground, in order to avoid contact
between the ends of the bumpers and
the equipment of the breakdown truck.
The following image illustrates the front
and rear attachment corners of the
vehicle, which are to be taken into
consideration when loading your vehicle
onto the assistance vehicle.
Loading Angles
A 12.045°
B 11.830°
08126S0001EM
Front And Rear Loading Angles
193
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Models
It is recommended to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground on
the flatbed of a roadside assistance
vehicle.
Caution!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is
not available, the vehicle must be
towed with the rear wheels lifted from
the ground using a trailer or special
equipment allowing lifting of the rear
wheels.
TOW EYES
If the vehicle has been in an accident or
has broken down, a tow eye is provided
in the tools container located inside the
luggage compartment for vehicle
towing. Towing is meant only for short
distances on a paved road surface.
Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:
1. Unhook the cap on the front or rear
bumper (if equipped), pushing on the
upper part.
2. Remove the tow eye from its
housing in the trunk and carefully clean
the threaded housing on the vehicle
before using it.
3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in
place (about 11 turns).
Note: The largest work angle of a tow
cable to fix on the tow hook must not
exceed 15°.
Warning!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye.
Tow straps may break or become
disengaged, causing serious injury or
death.
08136S0001EM
Front Tow Eye Cap
08136S0003EM
Rear Tow Eye Cap
08136S0002EM
Work Angle Of Tow Cable
194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage
may cause components to break resulting
in serious injury or death.
Caution!
The tow eye must be used exclusively
for roadside assistance operations. Only
use the tow eye with an appropriate device
in accordance with the highway code (a
rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for
a short distance to the nearest service
location.
Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow
vehicles off the road or where there are
obstacles.
In compliance with the above
conditions, towing with a tow eye must
take place with two vehicles (one towing,
the other towed) aligned as much as
possible along the same center line.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed.
When towing, only use a facility that can
tow vehicles with low ground clearances as
extensive damage can result by using a
standard tow truck platform.
ENHANCED
ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further
information on the Enhanced Accident
Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA
RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event
Data Recorder (EDR). The main
purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further
information on the Event Data Recorder
(EDR).
195
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Correct servicing permits the
performance of the vehicle to be
maintained over time, as well as limited
running costs and safeguarding the
efficiency of the safety systems.
This chapter explains how.
SCHEDULED SERVICING.......197
ENGINECOMPARTMENT ......201
BATTERY RECHARGING .......204
DEALER SERVICE ...........206
RAISING THE VEHICLE ........212
TIRES ...................213
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......228
STORING THE VEHICLE .......229
BODYWORK...............230
INTERIORS ................232
196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED
SERVICING
Correct servicing is crucial for
guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle
under the best conditions.
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has
planned a series of checks and services
for your vehicle at fixed intervals based
on distance and time, as described in
the Scheduled Servicing Plan.
Before each service, it is always
necessary to carefully follow the
instructions in the Scheduled Servicing
Plan (e.g. periodically check level of
fluids, tire pressure, etc.).
Scheduled Servicing is offered by an
authorized dealer according to a set
time schedule. If, during each
operation, in addition to the ones
scheduled, the need arises for further
replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out with the owner’s explicit
consent only.
Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals
are required by the Manufacturer.
Failure to have them carried out may
invalidate the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
You are advised to inform your
authorized dealer of any small operating
irregularities without waiting for the next
service.
Periodic Checks
Every month or every 600 miles
( 1,000 km) or before long trips check
and, if necessary, top off:
Engine coolant level.
Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible).
Windshield washer fluid level.
Tire inflation pressure and condition.
Operation of lighting system
(headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, etc.).
Operation of windshield
washing/wiping system and
positioning/wear of wiper blades.
Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check
and top off if required:
Engine oil level.
Heavy Usage Of The
Vehicle
If the vehicle is used under one of the
following conditions:
Dusty roads.
Short, repeated journeys less than
4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside
temperatures.
Engine often idling or driving long
distances at low speeds or long periods
of inactivity.
In the event of a long period of
inactivity.
The following checks must be carried
out more often than indicated in the
Scheduled Servicing Plan:
Check cleanliness of hood and trunk
locks, cleanliness and lubrication of
linkage.
Visually inspect conditions of: engine,
transmission, pipes and hoses
(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and
rubber elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).
Check battery charge and battery
fluid level (electrolyte).
Visually inspect conditions of the
accessory drive belts.
Check and, if necessary, change
engine oil and replace oil filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace
cabin air filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace air
cleaner.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a
dusty and off-road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only
very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
197
Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine)
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and
expiration date.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel
warning lights, etc.).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.
(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic
tool).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel
system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).
●●●●●●●
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ●●●●●●●●
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system
and adjust nozzles, if necessary.
●●●●●●●●
(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.
198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment
locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
●●●●●●●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc
brake pads and operation of pad wear indicators.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Brake pads/brake discs replacement.
(2)
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s).
●●● ●●● ●●● ●●●
Change engine coolant ●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Replace accessory drive belt/s.
(3)
Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ●●●●●●●
Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning
light or message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after each intensive use.
(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty
areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of
the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.
(4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
199
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Change the brake fluid.
(5)
Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o
Spark plug replacement.
* ●●●●●
(5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.
(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
* The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.
(o) Recommended operations
(●) Mandatory operations
Warning!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Checking Levels
2.9L V6 engine,
09026S0001EM
1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover
3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
201
Engine Oil
The engine oil level can be seen on the
instrument cluster display every time
the engine is started, or on the
Information and Entertainment system
display by activating on the main menu
(MENU button) the following functions
in sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil
Level”.
Check on the display using the
6 notches that the oil level is between
the MIN and MAX level: 1 notch MIN
level, 6 notches MAX level.
If the oil level is close to or below the
MIN mark, add oil gradually through the
filler, (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level
Indication Update On Display” in this
section) considering that each notch
shown on the display corresponds to
approximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).
The oil level can also be checked
manually.
Caution!
Make sure not to add too much oil when
topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess
may damage the engine. Have the vehicle
checked. Never exceed the MAX level
when topping off engine oil. It is advisable
to check the oil level in intermediate steps
using the oil dipstick.
The oil level is not refreshed immediately on
the display after topping off. Consequently,
wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the
display and follow the procedure below.
Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and
tighten to proper torque whenever it is
removed to add oil to engine. Never run
the engine with cap removed this could
cause oil to leak from engine.
Manual oil level checking
procedure
Check that the oil level is between the
MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean
it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it.
Extract the dipstick again and check
that the level is between the MIN and
MAX marks.
Top-Up And Oil Level Indication
Update On Display
Ifaengineoiltop-offisneeded,inorder
to ensure the correct indication of the
oil level on the display, leave the vehicle
on flat ground with the engine running
for approximately 5 minutes
(temperature higher than 176°F (80°C))
and shut the engine off then proceed
with the process below:
Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition
to the ON mode without starting the
engine and wait for a few seconds.
Note: If you have added the specified
amount of oil and the indicator is not
reading “Full”, please contact you
authorized dealer.
Warning!
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for
the engine to cool down before loosening
the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with
aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING:
risk of burns!
Caution!
The oil level must never exceed the MAX
mark.
If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last
notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,
go to your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the oil in excess removed.
Do not add oil with specifications
different from those of the oil already in the
engine.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain
substances which are harmful to the
environment. To change the oil and filters,
we advise you to contact your authorized
dealer.
202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Fluid
If the level is too low, unscrew the cap
of reservoir and add the fluid described
in the "Technical Specifications"
chapter.
Washer Fluid For
Windshield/Headlights
The windshield and headlights washer
fluid reservoir (if equipped) has a
telescopic filler.
If the level is too low, remove reservoir
cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid
described in the "Technical
Specifications" chapter.
Note: The headlight washing system
will not work if the liquid level is low (as
indicated by the symbol on the
instrument cluster display). The
windshield washer will keep working.
On vehicles equipped with headlight
washers, if equipped, there is a
reference notch on the dipstick: ONLY
the windshield/rear window washer
operates with the level below this
reference.
Brake Fluid
Check that the fluid is at the maximum
level. If the fluid level in the tank is low,
contact your authorized dealer to have
the system checked.
Automatic Transmission
Activation System Oil
The transmission control oil level should
only be checked at your authorized
dealer.
Useful Advice For
Extending The Life Of
Your Battery
To avoid draining your battery and
make it last longer, observe the
following instructions:
When you park the car, ensure that
the doors and trunk are closed properly
to prevent any lights from remaining on
inside the passenger's compartment.
Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,
hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on
for a long time when the engine is not
running.
Before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
negative battery cable.
If you wish to install electrical
accessories after purchasing the car
that require permanent electrical supply
(e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which
influence the electrical supply
requirements, contact your authorized
dealer, whose qualified staff will
evaluate the overall electrical
consumption.
Caution!
If the charge level remains under 50% for a
long time, the battery may be damaged by
sulphation, reducing its capacity and
efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is
also more prone to the risk of freezing (at
temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).
Note: After the battery is
disconnected, the steering must be
initialized. The
warning light on the
instrument panel switches on to
indicate this. To carry out this
procedure, simply turn the steering
wheel all the way from one end to the
other, and then turn it back to the
central position.
203
Battery
The battery does not require the
electrolyte to be topped up with distilled
water. A periodic check carried out at
an authorized dealer, however, is
necessary to check efficiency.
Follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions for maintenance.
Replacing The Battery
If necessary, replace the battery with
another original battery with the same
specifications. Follow the battery
manufacturer’s instructions for
maintenance.
Warning!
Battery acid is a corrosive solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: It will not be possible to open
the trunk with a key or by pressing the
button in the passenger compartment
when the battery is disconnected. So,
always position the manual trunk
opening strap on the trunk lock before
disconnecting the battery. The
procedure is described in the "Storing
The Vehicle" paragraph in this chapter.
BATTERY
RECHARGING
Important Notes
Warning!
Never charge or recharge a frozen
battery: it may explode because of the
nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.
At all times while charging or recharging
the battery, make sure that any sparks or
open flames are kept sufficiently far away
from the battery.
Note:
Before using the charging device,
always make sure that it is appropriate
for the installed battery, with constant
voltage (below 14.8 V) and low
amperage (maximum 15 A).
Recharge the battery in a well
ventilated environment.
Before using any devices to charge
or to maintain the charge of the
battery, carefully follow the instructions
provided with the device in order to
properly and safely connect it to the
car battery.
204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
You can recharge the battery without
disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's
electrical system.
To reach the battery, remove the
access panel inside the trunk.
Remove the protective cover and
connect the positive cable terminal of
the charger (usually red) to the positive
terminal (+) of the battery.
Connect the negative terminal of the
charger (usually black) to nut next to the
negative terminal (-) of the battery.
The vehicle is equipped with an IBS
(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is
able to measure the charge and
discharge voltage and calculate the
charge level and the general condition
of the battery. The sensor is placed next
to the negative terminal (-) of the
battery.
For a correct charge/discharge
procedure, the charge voltage must go
through the IBS sensor.
1. Turn the charger on and follow the
instructions on the user's manual to
completely recharge the battery.
2. When the battery is charged, turn
the charger off before disconnecting it
from the battery.
3. Disconnect the black cable terminal
of the battery charger and then the red
cable terminal.
4. Refit the protective cover of the
positive terminal of the battery and the
access cover to the battery
compartment.
Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger
is used with the battery fitted on the
vehicle, before connecting it disconnect
both cables of the battery itself. Do not
use a "quick-type" battery charger to
provide the starting voltage.
09036S0001EM
Battery Access Panel
09036S0002EM
Battery
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Negative Post (Nut)
205
DEALER SERVICE
The following pages contain
instructions on the required
maintenance from the technical
personnel who designed the vehicle.
In addition to these specific
maintenance instructions specified for
routine scheduled servicing, there are
other components which may require
periodic maintenance or replacement
over the vehicle’s life cycle.
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Level Check
To ensure correct engine lubrication, the
oil must always be kept at the
prescribed level (see "Engine
Compartment" in this chapter).
Check the oil level at regular intervals,
for example every 1864 miles
(3000 km).
It must be checked about five minutes
after stopping the engine, once full
operating temperature is reached. The
vehicle must also be parked on as level
a surface as possible.
The engine oil level can be checked
using the Information and Entertainment
system. To access the function, activate
the main menu (MENU button) and
select the following options in
sequence: “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil
level”.
Changing The Engine Oil
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Choice Of Engine Oil Type
To ensure optimal performance and
maximum protection in all operating
conditions, it is advisable to use solely
certified engine oils (see description in
"Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical
Specifications" chapter).
Additives For Engine Oil
It is strongly recommended not to use
additives (other than leak detection
dyes) with the engine oil.
The engine oil is a product designed
specially for the vehicle and its
performance may be deteriorated
through the use of further additives.
Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And
Filters
For the disposal of the engine oil and
filters, contact the appropriate body to
determine local regulations.
Note: Used engine oil disposed of
incorrectly may seriously harm the
environment.
Engine Oil Filter
Replacing The Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter must be replaced
each time the engine oil is changed. It is
advised to replace it with a genuine
spare part, specifically designed for this
vehicle.
Air Filter
Replacing The Air Cleaner
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals. It is advised
to replace it with a genuine spare part,
specifically designed for this vehicle.
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
To ensure the best possible
performance, the air conditioning
system must be checked and undergo
maintenance at an authorized dealer at
the beginning of the summer.
Caution!
Do not use chemicals to clean the air
conditioning system, since the internal
components may be damaged. This kind
of damage is not covered by warranty.
Replace The Cabin Air Filter
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals. For cleaner
replacement, contact an authorized
dealer.
206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer
for your air conditioning system. Some
unapproved refrigerants are flammable and
can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can
cause the system to fail, requiring costly
repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
Book, located in your owner’s information
kit, for further warranty information.
Lubricating Moving
Parts Of The Bodywork
Ensure that the locks and bodywork
junction points, including components
such as the seat guides, door hinges
(and rollers), trunk and hood are
periodically lubricated with
lithium-based grease to ensure correct,
silent operation and to protect them
from rust and wear.
Thoroughly clean the components,
eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.
After lubricating, eliminate excess oil
and grease. Also pay particular
attention to the hood closing devices,
to ensure correct operation. During
operations on the hood, to be carried
out with the engine cold, also
remember to check, clean and lubricate
the locking, release and safety devices.
Lubricate the external lock barrels twice
a year. Apply a small amount of
high-quality lubricant directly into the
lock barrel.
If necessary, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Windshield Wiper
Periodically clean the windshield and
rear window and rubber profile of the
windshield wiper blades, using a
sponge or a soft cloth and a
non-abrasive detergent. This eliminates
the salt or impurities accumulated when
driving.
Prolonged operation of the windshield
window wipers with dry glass may
cause the deterioration of the blades, in
addition to abrasion of the surface of
the glass. To eliminate the impurities on
the dry glass, always operate the
windshield washers.
In the event of very low outdoor
temperatures, below zero degrees,
ensure that the movement of the rubber
part in contact with the glass is not
obstructed. Use a suitable deicing
product to release it if required.
Avoid using the windshield wipers to
remove frost or ice.
Also avoid contact of the rubber profile
of the blades with petroleum derivatives
such as engine oil, gas, etc.
Warning!
Driving with worn windshield wiper blades
is a serious hazard, because visibility is
reduced in bad weather conditions.
Note: The life of the windshield wiper
blades varies according to the usage
frequency. In any case, it is advised to
replace the blades approximately once
a year. When the blades are worn,
noise, marks on the glass or streaks of
water may be noticed. In the presence
of these conditions, clean the
windshield wiper blades or, if
necessary, replace them.
Raising The Windshield Wiper
Blades ("Service Position"
Function)
The "service position" function allows
the driver to replace the windshield
wiper blades more easily. It is also
recommended to activate this function
when it is snowing and to make it easier
to remove any dirt deposits in the area
where the blades are normally
positioned, when washing.
Activation Of The Function
To activate this function, disable the
windshield wiper before setting the
ignition device to STOP.
207
This function can only be activated
within two minutes of cycling the
ignition to STOP.
To activate this function, move the lever
upward for at least three seconds.
Function Deactivation
The function is deactivated if:
More than two minutes passes
before cycling the ignition to the STOP
position after having raised the lever
and putting the wipers into service
position.
The ignition is cycled to the ON
position and the windshield wiper
control is used.
If, after using the function, the ignition is
set back to ON with the blades in a
position other than rest position (at the
base of the windshield), they will only
return to rest position following a
command given using the stalk (stalk
upwards, into unstable position) or
when a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is
exceeded.
Replacing The Windshield Wiper
Blades
Proceed as follows:
1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of
the attachment spring and remove the
blade from the arm.
2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab
in the dedicated housing in the arm and
checking that it is locked.
3. Lower the wiper arm onto the
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the windshield
wiper with the blades lifted from the
windshield.
Windshield Washer
The window washer nozzles are fixed. If
there is no jet of fluid, first check that
there is fluid in the reservoir (see
paragraph “Engine Compartment” in
this chapter).
Then, check that the nozzle holes are
not clogged; use a needle to unblock
them if necessary.
Exhaust System
Adequate maintenance of the engine
exhaust system represents the best
protection against leaks of carbon
monoxide into the passenger
compartment.
If an unusual noise from the exhaust or
the presence of smoke in the
passenger compartment is identified, or
if the underbody or rear section of the
vehicle have been damaged, have the
09046S0001EM
Multifunction Lever
09046S0002EM
Wiper Release Tab
09046S0003EM
Windshield Washers
1 — Washer Nozzles
208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
entire exhaust system and adjoining
bodywork areas checked at your
authorized dealer to identify any
components which are broken,
damaged, worn or have moved from
their correct fitting position.
Open welding or loose connections
may permit exhaust gas to enter the
passenger compartment.
Have the exhaust system checked
every time the vehicle is raised. Replace
the components where necessary (for
these operations, contact an authorized
dealer).
In normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter does not require
maintenance. To ensure that it operates
correctly, however, and prevent it from
getting damaged, it is extremely
important that the engine operates
perfectly.
To minimize the risk of damaging the
catalytic converter, proceed as follows:
Do not stop the engine or deactivate
the ignition with gear engaged and
vehicle in motion.
Do not attempt to start the engine
by bump starting.
Do not persist in using the vehicle if
idling is very irregular or the operating
conditions are very notably irregular.
Warning!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if
you park over materials that can burn.
Such materials might be grass or leaves
coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
can contact anything that can burn.
Cooling System
Warning!
Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan
motor lead before working near the radiator
cooling fan.
You or others can be badly burned by
hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts
automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn
the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
You or others can be badly burned by
hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Check
Your vehicle has two cooling systems
and they both need to be checked to
ensure they are at proper fill levels.
Refer to the “Engine Compartment”
section for the locations.
Check the engine coolant and
intercooler coolant level every oil
change or before long trips.
If there are impurities in the engine
coolant, the system must be drained,
flushed and refilled: contact an
authorized dealer.
Check the front part of the condenser
to check for any build-up of insects,
leaves or other debris. Should it be
dirty, clean it by spraying delicately with
water.
209
Check the hoses of the engine/
intercooler cooling system to ensure
that the rubber has not deteriorated
and that there are no cracks, tears, cuts
or obstructions in the expansion tank
side and radiator side connectors.
Should there be any doubt regarding
leaks from the system (e.g. if frequent
top ups are required), have the seal
checked at an authorized dealer.
With the engine off and at normal
operating temperature, check that the
cooling system radiator cap is closed
properly.
Warning!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than
the one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
Note: Before removing the coolant
reservoir cap, wait for the system to
cool down.
Topping Up / Draining / Flushing
The Engine/Intercooler Coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty,
have cleaning and flushing carried out
at an authorized dealer.
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Note:
For topping up, use a fluid with the
same characteristics as those
indicated in the "Fluids And
Lubricants" table (see "Technical
Specifications" chapter).
Do not use pure water,
alcohol-based coolants, corrosions
inhibitors or additional anti-rust
products because they may be
incompatible with the engine coolant
and cause the clogging of the radiator.
The use of propylene glycol-based
coolant is also not recommended.
Engine Cooling/Intercooler System
Cap
To prevent loss of engine coolant, make
sure that the expansion tank cap is
closed. If it is open, screw it completely
until you reach/hear the click.
Periodically check the cap and clean it
from any foreign bodies that may have
deposited on the external surface.
Warning!
Never add coolant with the engine hot
or overheated.
Do not attempt to cool an overheated
engine by loosening or removing the cap.
The heat causes a considerable increase in
pressure in the cooling system.
To prevent damage to the engine, only
use the engine cooling circuit caps
provided.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is
subject to legal requirements: contact
the appropriate body to determine local
regulations.
Note:
To prevent the fluid from being
ingested by children or animals, do
not keep it in open containers or pour
it on the ground. If ingested, contact a
doctor immediately. Eliminate any
traces of fluid from the ground
immediately.
When the vehicle stops after a short
trip, steam may be seen coming out
from front of the hood. This is a
normal phenomenon which is due to
the presence of rain, snow or a lot of
moisture on the surface of the radiator.
210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
With engine and system cold, do
not top up with coolant beyond the
maximum level indicated on the
reservoir in the engine compartment.
Braking System
In order to guarantee the efficiency of
the braking system, periodically check
its components; for this operation,
contact an authorized dealer.
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Note: Driving with your foot resting on
the brake pedal may compromise its
efficiency, increasing the risk of
accidents. When driving, never keep
your foot on the brake pedal and don’t
put unnecessary strain on it to prevent
the brakes from overheating: excess
pad wear may cause damage to the
braking system.
When an insufficient oil level is
detected, contact an authorized dealer
to have the system checked.
Always keep the cap of the brake
fluid reservoir (in the engine
compartment) completely closed.
Warning!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling
point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Use only a transmission oil with the
same characteristics as those indicated
in the "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see
"Technical Specifications" chapter).
Special Additives
Do not use any type of additive with the
automatic transmission oil. The
automatic transmission oil is a product
designed specially for this vehicle and
its performance may be compromised
through the use of further additives.
Caution!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
211
Frequency of Oil Changes
In normal vehicle operating conditions,
it is not necessary to change the
transmission oil.
Caution!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. Your
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Replacing The Battery
If necessary, replace the battery with
another battery with the same
specifications. It is advised to contact
an authorized dealer for replacement.
Follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions for maintenance.
Note: It will not be possible to open
the trunk with a key or by pressing the
button in the passenger compartment
when the battery is disconnected. So,
always position the manual trunk
opening strap on the trunk lock before
disconnecting the battery. The
procedure is described in the "Storing
The Vehicle" section in this chapter.
RAISING THE
VEHICLE
If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an
authorized dealer which is equipped
with shop jacks or jack arms.
The vehicle lifting points are marked on
the side skirts with the
symbols.
09056S0001EM
Vehicle Lift Point Locations
212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover
aspects of the following information:
Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Note:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards.
P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is
based on European design standards.
Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the section width. The
letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing
is based on U.S. design standards.
The size designation for LT-Metric tires
is the same as for P-Metric tires except
for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed
for temporary emergency use only.
Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards and it begins
with the tire diameter molded into the
sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
0601085395US
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desi-
gnation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service De-
scription
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
213
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger
car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,
vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of
the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the
outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it
on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department
of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for
highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
215
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle
B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures.
216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Note: The proper cold tire inflation
pressure is listed on the driver’s side
B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's
side door.
Tire And Loading Information
Placard
This placard tells you important
information about the:
1. Number of people that can be
carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the
front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire
must not exceed the load carrying
capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire
and Loading Information placard in
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And
Operating” section of this manual.
Note: Under a maximum loaded
vehicle condition, gross axle weight
ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And
Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading
conditions of your vehicle, locate the
statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
0806115150US
Example Tire Placard Location
(Door)
0806115151US
Example Tire Placard Location
(B-Pillar)
GUID-054900418-high.tif
Tire And Loading Information
Placard
217
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals
635 kg and there will be five 68 kg
passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =
295 kg) as shown in step 4.
Note:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. The following table
shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use
tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
GUID-054900419-high.tif
219
Tires — General
Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of
your vehicle. Four primary areas are
affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety and Vehicle Stability
Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort
Safety
Warning!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause
steering problems. You could lose control
of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation
affect the stability of the vehicle and can
produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
Note:
Unequal tire pressures from side to
side may cause erratic and
unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to
side may cause the vehicle to drift left
or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire
rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause abnormal wear patterns and
reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Over-inflation
produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear
edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a
good quality pocket-type pressure
gauge. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or
visible damage.
Caution!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the
placard are always “cold tire inflation
pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall.
220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if
subject to a wide range of outdoor
temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately
1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a
garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature =
32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to
6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation.
DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too
low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed
Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at
safe speeds and within posted speed
limits. Where speed limits or conditions
are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Warning!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressures
For vehicle speeds below 100 mph
(160 km/h), recommended cold tire
inflation pressures are listed on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard
located on driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver's side door.
When driving at speeds 100 mph
(160 km/h) and above, increased tire
pressures and reduced vehicle loading
are required for high-speed vehicle
operation.
For driving speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) recommended cold tire
inflation pressures are listed below
under "High Speed Tire Inflation
Pressure". Vehicle loading condition
must not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg)
(driver + three passengers + 88 lbs.
(40kg) luggage).
Warning!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision.
221
Tires Wheel
Recommended
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
High Speed Tire
Inflation Pressure
Front Rear Front Rear
Original Equipment
245/35Z R19
93Y XL 19x8.5J
35 psi/
240kpa
–
42 psi/
290kpa
–
285/30Z R19 98Y XL 19x10J –
32 psi/
220kpa
–
42 psi/
290kpa
Snow Tires
245/35R19 93V XL M+S 19x8.5J
35 psi/
240kpa
–
42 psi/
290kpa
–
285/30R19 98V XL M+S or
265/35R19 98V XL M+S
19x10J –
32 psi/
220kpa
–
42 psi/
290kpa
Radial Ply Tires
Warning!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may
be repaired if it meets the following
criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when
flat.
The damage is only on the tread
section of your tire (sidewall damage is
not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼
of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire
repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat
tires that have experienced a loss of
pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to
drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph
(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is
referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer
while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section
for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously
without stopping.
222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure.
A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than
30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in
determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the
bottom of the tread grooves. They will
appear as bands when the tread depth
becomesa1/16ofaninch(1.6mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires”
in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent
upon varying factors including, but not
limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire
inflation pressures can cause uneven
wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns
will reduce tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed
rating of V or higher, and Summer tires
typically have a reduced tread life.
Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
maintenance schedule is highly
recommended.
Warning!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a
balance of many characteristics. They
should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is
needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.
Refer to the T ire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example
found in the “Tire Safety Information”
section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two
front tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you
ever replace a wheel, make sure that
the wheel’s specifications match those
of the original wheels.
0806104865NA
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2 — New T ire
223
It is recommended you contact your
authorized tire dealer or original
equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
Warning!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved
for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load
index or capacity, other than what was
originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could result in
tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
Caution!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false
speedometer and odometer readings.
Spare Tires — If
Equipped
Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire
Repair Kit instead of a spare tire, please
refer to “Tire Repair Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Caution!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or
limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original
Equipped Tire And Wheel — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
spare tire and wheel equivalent in look
and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may
be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If
Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if
your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare
tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire
descriptions begin with the letter “T” or
“S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be
repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt
to mount a conventional tire on the
compact spare wheel, since the wheel
is designed specifically for the compact
spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire may look
like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited
tread life. When the tread is wor n to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary
use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If
Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for
temporary emergency use only. This tire
is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Warning!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at the
first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim
Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially
aluminum and chrome plated wheels,
should be cleaned regularly using mild
(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium
chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals
used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do
not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
Note: Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners contain strong acids or strong
alkaline additives that can harm the
wheel surface.
Caution!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. These products
and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels
including excessive brake dust, care
must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the
225
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not
use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Caution!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
Note: If you intend parking or storing
your vehicle for an extended period
after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. Driving the
vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake
rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome
Wheels
Caution!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT
USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A
SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all
seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and
Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All
season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires
— If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both
wet and dry conditions, and are not
intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer
tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are
less than 45°F (7°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/
snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Warning!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the
use of snow tires during the Winter.
Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the
tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed
ratings than what was originally
equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve
performance on ice, skid and traction
capability on wet or dry surfaces may
be poorer than that of non-studded
tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Tire Chains (Traction
Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against
damage.
Note:
Traction device must be of proper
size for the tire, as recommended by
the traction device manufacturer
Use on Rear Tires Only
Due to limited clearance, the
following traction devices are
recommended:
For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a
zero-clearance snow traction device
recommended.
It is not possible to install traction
devices on 285/30R19 tires.
Caution!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition
are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
Observe the traction device
manufacturer’s instructions on the method
of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a
compact spare tire.
227
Tire Rotation
Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of
vehicles operate at different loads and
perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons,
they wear at unequal rates. These
effects can be reduced by timely
rotation of tires. Rotation will increase
tread life, maintain traction levels and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
To resolve this problem, tires should be
rotated at each service interval
(approximately every 10,000 miles
[16,000km]). More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotations Not Recommended -
If Equipped
Due to different size tires and wheels on
front and rear axles tire rotation is not
possible for:
2.9 L V6 Engine Equipped with 19”
tires and wheels
Caution!
Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19”
front and rear tires are rotated
Tire rotation contributes to the
preservation of the grip and traction
performance on wet, muddy or snowy
roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability
of the vehicle.
In the case of irregular wear of the tires
identify the cause and correct it as soon
as possible, by contacting an
authorized dealer.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading
categories were established by the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration. The specific grade
rating assigned by the tire's
manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires
on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a
comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from
09066S0002EM
Tire Rotation
228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required
by law.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE
VEHICLE
If the vehicle is left inactive for longer
than a month, the following precautions
should be observed:
Park the vehicle in an area that is
covered and dry, and well-ventilated if
possible. Slightly open the windows.
Check that the electric park brake is
not activated.
Carry out the procedure: “manual
trunk opening device” procedure
described in this paragraph.
Disconnect the negative battery
terminal and check the battery charge.
Repeat this check once every three
months during storage.
If the battery is not disconnected
from the electrical system, check its
state of charge every thirty days.
Clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax.
Clean and protect the shiny metal
parts using special compounds
available commercially.
Sprinkle talcum powder on the
windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift
them off the glass.
229
Cover the vehicle with a fabric or
perforated plastic sheet, paying
particular care not to damage the
painted surface by dragging any dust
that may have accumulated on it. Do
not use compact plastic sheets, as they
do not allow humidity to evaporate from
the surface of the vehicle.
Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
above the standard prescribed pressure
and check it periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling
system.
Any time the vehicle is left inactive
for two weeks or more, operate the air
conditioning system with engine idling
for at least five minutes, setting exter nal
air and with fan set to maximum speed.
This operation will ensure appropriate
lubrication for the system, thus
minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the system is
operated again.
Note: After cycling the ignition to
STOP and having closed the driver side
door, wait at least one minute before
disconnecting the electrical supply from
the battery. When reconnecting the
electrical supply to the battery, make
sure that the ignition is in the STOP
position and the driver side door is
closed.
Manual Trunk Opening Device
Proceed as follows if the battery needs
to be disconnected:
1. From the trunk interior covering,
rotate the plug to the left of the lock
and extract the strap connected to it.
2. Make sure the free end of the strap
remains outside the deck lid when
closing the deck lid.
3. The trunk can now be opened
manually by pulling the strap.
Note: This procedure must be carried
out exclusively in safe places because it
allows to open the trunk unconditionally.
BODYWORK
Protection Against
Atmospheric Agents
The vehicle is equipped with the best
available technological solutions to
protect the bodywork against corrosion.
These include:
Painting products and systems
which give the vehicle resistance to
corrosion and abrasion.
Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)
steel sheets, with high resistance to
corrosion.
Spraying of plastic parts, with a
protective function in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner wing, edges,
etc.
Use of “open” boxed sections to
prevent condensation and pockets of
moisture which could favor the
formation of rust inside.
Use of special films to protect
against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g.
rear wing, doors, etc.).
Corrosion Warranty
Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion
Warranty against perforation due to rust
of any original element of the structure
or bodywork. For the general terms of
this warranty, refer to the Warranty
Booklet.
09086S0001EM
Trunk Compartment
230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Preserving The
Bodywork
Paint
Touch up abrasions and scratches
immediately to prevent the formation of
rust.
Maintenance of paintwork consists of
washing the car: the frequency
depends on the conditions and
environment where the car is used. For
example, it is advisable to wash the
vehicle more often in areas with high
levels of atmospheric pollution or salted
roads.
Some parts of the vehicle may be
covered with a matte paint which, in
order to be maintained intact, requires
special care.
To correctly wash the vehicle, follow
these instructions:
If high pressure jets or cleaners are
used to wash the vehicle, keep a
distance of at least 15 inches (40 cm)
from the bodywork to avoid damage or
alteration. Build up of water could
cause damage to the vehicle in the long
term.
To make it easier to remove any dirt
deposits in the area where the blades
are normally located it is recommended
to position the windshield wipers
vertically (service position), for more
information, refer to “Dealer Service” in
this chapter.
Wash the bodywork using a low
pressure jet of water if possible.
Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
solution over the bodywork, frequently
rinsing the sponge.
Rinse well with water and dry with a
leather chamois.
Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door
frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.)
with special care, as water may
stagnate more easily in these areas. Do
not wash the car after it has been left in
the sun or with the hood hot: this may
alter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned
in the same way as the rest of the
vehicle.
If washing the car in a service that
moves the car, for cars with automatic
transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut
out. You have to shut off the engine in
the following conditions: car stopped,
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the
starter button for at least three
seconds.
Note: Avoid parking under trees; the
resin dropped by trees makes the
paintwork go opaque and increases the
possibility of corrosion.
Windows
Use specific detergents and clean
cloths to prevent scratching or altering
the transparency.
Caution!
Wipe the rear window inside gently with a
cloth following the direction of the filaments
to avoid damaging the heating device.
Front Headlights
Use a soft cloth soaked in water and
detergent for washing cars.
Note:
Never use aromatic substances
(e.g. gasoline) or ketones (e.g.
acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses
of the headlights.
When cleaning with a pressure
washer, keep the pressure washer at
least eight inches (20 cm) away from
the headlights.
Engine Compartment
At the end of every winter, wash the
engine compartment thoroughly, taking
care not to aim the jet of water directly
at the electronic control units or at the
windshield wiper motors. Have this
operation performed at a specialized
workshop.
Note:
The washing should take place
with the engine cold and the ignition
device in the STOP position. After the
washing operation, make sure that the
various protections (e.g. rubber caps and
guards) have not been removed or
damaged.
231
INTERIORS
Periodically check the cleanliness of the
interior, beneath the mats, which could
cause oxidation of the sheet metal.
Seats And Fabric Parts
Remove dust with a soft brush or a
vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a
moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub
the seats with a sponge moistened with
a solution of water and neutral
detergent.
Leather Seats — If
Equipped
Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or
slightly damp cloth, without exerting too
much pressure.
Remove any liquid or grease stains
using an absorbent dry cloth, without
rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or
buckskin cloth dampened with water
and mild soap. If the stain persists, use
specific products and observe the
instructions carefully.
Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure
that the cleaning products used contain
no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even
in small quantities.
Plastic And Coated
Parts
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp
cloth (if possible made from microfiber),
and a solution of water and neutral,
non-abrasive detergent.
To clean oily or persistent stains, use
specific products free from solvents and
designed to maintain the original
appearance and color of the
components.
Remove any dust using a microfiber
cloth, if necessary moistened with
water. The use of paper tissues is not
recommended as these may leave
residues.
Genuine Leather Parts —
If Equipped
Use only water and mild soap to clean
these parts. Never use alcohol or
alcohol-based products.
Before using a specific product for
cleaning interiors, make sure that it
does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol
based substances.
Carbon Fiber Parts
To eliminate small scratches and marks
on the carbon, contact your authorized
dealer. An improperly performed
operation may irreparably damage the
carbon.
232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Everything you may find useful for
understanding how your vehicle is
made and works is contained in this
chapter and illustrated with data, tables
and graphics. For the enthusiasts and
the technician, but also just for those
who want to know every detail of their
vehicle.
IDENTIFICATION DATA.........234
ENGINE..................235
POWER SUPPLY ............236
TRANSMISSION.............237
BRAKES..................238
SUSPENSION ..............239
STEERING SYSTEM ..........240
DIMENSIONS ..............241
WEIGHTS.................243
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........244
FLUID CAPACITIES ...........246
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS......247
PERFORMANCE ............249
233
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
Vehicle Identification
Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
is stamped on a plate on the front left
corner of the dashboard cover, which
can be seen from outside the vehicle,
through the windshield.
This number is also printed on the
chassis at the front left shock absorber
and can be seen by opening the engine
compartment hood.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) Plate
The plates are located on the left side A
pillar and contain the data about:
Chassis number (VIN).
Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).
Color code.
Place of manufacturing of the vehicle
(USA and Mexico only).
Vehicle manufacturing date.
Maximum permitted weights.
Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA
and Canada only).
10016S0001EM
Vehicle Identification Number
10016S0002EM
Vehicle Identification Number
234
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
2.9L V6 Engine
Cycle Four
Number and
position of cylinders 6/V
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82
Total displacement (cm³) 2891
Compression ratio 9.3:1
Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505
Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500
Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443
Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500
Fuel
Gasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91, ethanol percentage is
0–15%.
(*)
(*) To comply with all emission limits while simultaneously guaranteeing minimal consumption and maximum performance, use premium-quality unleaded gasoline
with octane rating (A.K.I.) of 91 or higher.
235
POWER SUPPLY
Power supply
2.9L V6 Engine
Phased sequential
electronic injection with knock control and variable
intake valve actuation
236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMISSION
Model Transmission Traction
2.9L V6 Engine Eight forwar
d gears plus reverse Rear
237
BRAKES
Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake
2.9L V6 Engine
Disc
or
Carbon Ceramic
disc
Disc
or
Carbon Ceramic disc
Electric
Caution!
Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is
better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
238
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION
Model Front Rear
2.9L V6 Engine
Independent wheel
double-wishbone
suspension
Independent wheel with multilink system
239
STEERING SYSTEM
Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft
(11.30 m)
Rack and pinion with electric power
steering
240
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions
Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with
vehicle unladen.
AB C D EFGH I
31.30 111.02 40.31 182.64 56.14 61.22 63.27 79.69 73.74
10106S0002EM
241
Luggage Compartment Volume
Capacity (V.D.A. standards)
Rear seats not folded
Vehicle unladen: 16.96 cubic feet
242
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WEIGHTS
Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and
without optional
equipment)
3806
Payload including the driver
(*)
905
Maximum permitted loads
(**)
155
– front axle 2260
– rear axle 2646
– total 4774
Towable loads –
(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted
loads.
243
FUEL
REQUIREMENTS
This engine is
designed to meet all
emission regulations,
and provide
satisfactory fuel
economy and
performance, when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. For optimum
performance and fuel economy the use
of “Premium” 91 octane gasoline or
higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with the
required octane number, hearing a light
knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a
lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause
problems such as hard starting, stalling,
and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for
the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the
use of cleaner burning gasoline referred
to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains
oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended
reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate
Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded
gasoline with oxygenates such as
ethanol.
Caution!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol
or gasoline containing more than 15%
ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using
gasoline containing more than 15%
ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of
the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to
run on compressed natural gas (CNG)
or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that
result from running CNG or LP are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-
containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance
in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline
244
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating, gasolines that
contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and
maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to further
aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system
cleaning agents should be avoided.
Many of these materials intended for
gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
Caution!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited
by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the
catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice
a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for
service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the
use of such fuels or additives is not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Note: Intentional tampering with the
emissions control system can result in
civil penalties being assessed against
you.
245
FLUID CAPACITIES
2.9L V6 Engine
U.S. Metric
Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters
Fuel tank
reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters
Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters
Automatic transmission – –
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 – –
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV
Main body: 0.8 Quarts
Left TV: 0.5 Quarts
Right TV: 0.6 Quarts
Main body: 0.8 Liters
Left TV: 0.5 Liters
Right TV: 0.6 Liters
RDU 230-LSD differential – –
RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) – –
RDU 210/215-LSD differential – –
246
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of
the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission
specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.
2.9L V6 — Engine Lubrication
Features Specification Replacement interval
SAE 0W-40
Pennzoil Ultra
API
SN
FPT 9.55535-Z2
MS-12991
According to the Maintenance Plan
If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to
top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
247
Chassis Lubrication
Use Features Specification Applications
Lubricants and greases
ZF 8HP
50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission
SAE 75W-140 API GL-4 synthetic
lubricant
FPW9.55550-MZ8
Differential and reduction units
RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine
SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 synthetic
lubricant
FPW9.55550-DA8
Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes
Engine coolant
CUNA NC 956-16
ASTMD3306
MS.90032
Use rate 50% Not mixable with
different formulation products.
(*)
Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043
To be used diluted or undiluted in
windshield washer/wiper systems
HVAC
R1234yf or R134yf (depending on
market)
––
(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.
248
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE
Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.
Model Maximum speed mph
Acceleration from
0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec.
2.9L V6 Engine 191 3.8
249
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .251
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....251
WARRANTY INFORMATION .....252
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .253
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .253
250
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The
Appointment
If you are having warranty work done,
be sure to bring the right papers with
you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be
covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of
your vehicle's service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's
problems or the specific work you want
done. If you've had an accident or work
done that is not on your maintenance
log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With
Requests
If you list a number of items and you
must have your vehicle by the end of
the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in
order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED
ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized
dealer are vitally interested in your
satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly
recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and
high quality service. The manufacturer's
authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and
in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first.
Most matters can be resolved with this
process.
If for some reason you are still not
satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact
the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the
manufacturer's customer center should
include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Alfa Romeo Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI
48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
Alfa Romeo Customer
Center (Canada)
P.O. Box 1621 W indsor, Ontario N9A
4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)
Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Customer Assistance
For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has
installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or
a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in
the United States, can communicate
with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
251
Canadian residents with hearing
difficulties that require assistance can
use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service
operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service
contract for a vehicle to help protect
you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer's service
contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of
the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's
Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind
any service contract that is not the
manufacturer's service contract. It is
not responsible for any service contract
other than the manufacturer's service
contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a
major investment when you purchased
the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in
facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
Warning!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion
engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY
INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet,
for the terms and provisions of FCA US
LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
252
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States
And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect that could cause a crash
or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you,
your authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov
.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, you should contact
the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers
who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor
Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
.
PUBLICATION
ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you
may use either the website or the
phone numbers listed below. Visa,
Mastercard, American Express, and
Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals
provide the information that students
and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem
solving, maintaining, servicing, and
repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is
written in straightforward language with
illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled
with diagrams, charts and detailed
illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests, and a complete list of
all tools and equipment.
253
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been
prepared with the assistance of service
and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance
procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
254
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
Accessories Purchased By The
Owner ...................3
Active Aerodynamics ...........57
Active Safety Systems ..........90
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)
System ..................93
Adaptive Cruise Control ........151
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ............151
Additional Heaters.............48
Additives, Fuel ..............245
AirBag...................110
Air Bag Components .....109,115
Air Bag Operation ..........112
Air Bag Warning Light .......110
Driver Knee Air Bag .........112
Enhanced Accident Response . .195
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .195
FrontAirBag .............110
If A Deployment Occurs ......115
Knee Impact Bolsters .......112
Maintaining Your Air Bag
System ................117
Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light ..................110
Side Air Bags .............113
Transporting Pets ..........127
Air Bag Light ............110,128
Air Bag Maintenance ..........117
Air Pressure, Tires ............220
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19
Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....145
Alfa DNA System.............142
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System....90
Automatic Dimming Mirror........33
Automatic Headlights...........34
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) ...................43
Automatic Transmission ........136
Auxiliary Driving Systems ........93
B-Pillar Location .............217
Battery ...................204
Battery Recharging ...........204
Belts, Seat.................128
Blind Spot Monitoring ..........
9
3
Bodywork (Cleaning And
Maintenance) .............230
Brakes ...................238
Brake Fluid Level ...........203
Brightness, Interior Lights ........39
Bulbs, Light ................129
Camera, Rear...............166
Carbon Monoxide Warning ......128
Cargo Tie-Downs .............52
Certification Label ............169
Changing A Flat Tire...........212
Chart, Tire Sizing.............214
Checking Levels .............201
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . .127
Checks, Safety ..............127
Child Restraint ..............118
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............120
Child Restraints ...........118
Child Seat Installation ........126
How To Stow An Unused ALR
Seat Belt ................124
Infants And Child Restraints . . . .119
LATCH Positions ..........121
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ................121
Older Children And Child
Restraints ...............119
Seating Positions ..........121
Using The Top Tether
Anchorage ..............126
Clean Air Gasoline ............244
Cleaning
Wheels ................225
Climate Control ............42,45
Close The Hood ..............51
Compact Spare Tire...........224
Contract, Service ............252
Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb
Replacement) .............178
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .151
Cupholder..................56
Cupholders .................56
Customer Assistance ..........251
Daytime Running Lights .........34
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) .....34
Defroster, Windshield ..........128
Dimensions ................241
Direction Indicators (Changing A
Bulb)...................178
Disabled Vehicle Towing ........193
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock —
Rear Doors ...............25
Power Door Locks ..........24
Doors.....................20
Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .90
Driving Modes ..............143
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
System ..................93
Electric Park Brake ...........134
Electric Remote Mirrors .........33
Electric Steering Wheel Heating ....32
Electronic Speed Control........149
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) ..............149,151
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System ..................91
Emergency Refuelling..........192
Emergency Starting ...........189
Emergency, In Case Of .........186
Hazard Warning Flasher ......175
Jacking ................212
Jump Starting .........189,190
Overheating .............192
Tow Hooks ..............194
Towing .................193
Engine ...................235
Engine Coolant Level ........203
Exhaust Gas Caution ........128
Fuel Requirements .........244
Jump Starting .........189,190
Overheating .............192
Starting ................191
T
emperatur
e Gauge .........60
Engine Compartment ..........201
Engine Compartment (Washing) . . .231
Engine Oil
Level Check ..............202
Engine Overheating ...........192
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature .................195
Environmental Protection Systems . .57
Ethanol ...................244
Exhaust Gas Caution ..........128
Exhaust System .............128
Exterior Lighting ............34,35
Exterior Lights ............34,129
External Lights ...............34
Fire Extinguisher ..............56
Flashers
Hazard Warning ...........175
Turn Signal ............36,129
Fluid Leaks ................129
Fluids And Lubricants..........247
Forward Collision Warning........96
Front Light Cluster With Main Beam
Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights
(Bulb Replacement) .........178
Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active
Aero) ...................57
Front Seat Electric Heating .......28
Front Seats (Power Seats)........27
Front Wipers
Wiper Operation ...........40
Fuel
Additives ...............245
Clean Air ...............244
Ethanol ................244
Gauge ..................60
Materials Added ...........245
Methanol ...............244
Fuse Boxes ................181
Fuses (Replacement) ..........180
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . .53
INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air ...........244
Gasoline, Reformulated ........244
Gauges
Speedometer .............60
Tachometer ..............60
General Information .........95,158
Glove Compartment ...........53
Glove Compartment Light ........38
Glove Compartment Light (Bulb
Replacement) .............179
GVWR...................169
Hazard Warning Flasher ........175
Head Restraints ............29,30
Head Rests .................29
Headlights
Switch ...............34,35
Headlights (Cleaning) ..........231
Heated Mirrors ...............34
High Beam Headlights ..........35
Automatic High Beam
Headlights ................36
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System .....92
Hood.....................50
Hood Release ...............50
Identification Data ............234
Ignition ....................16
Installing Electrical/Electronic
Devices...................3
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display .....61
Reconfigurable Instrument
Cluster Display .............61
Instrument Panel Features
Instrument Panel Features ......59
Interior Ambient Lighting .........38
Interior Lights ................37
Interiors (Cleaning) ............232
Internal Equipment ............53
Jack Operation ..............212
Jump Starting............189,190
Key Fob
Remote Keyless Entry ........14
Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer
System ..................18
Lane Change ................36
Lane Change And Turn Signals ....36
Lane Departure Warning System. . .163
LaneSense ................163
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........104
Latches ..................129
Leaks, Fluid ................129
Life
Of
Tires ................223
Lifting The Vehicle ............212
Light Bulbs ................129
Types Of Bulbs ............176
Light Switch ................34
Lights ....................129
AirBag .............110,128
Automatic Headlights ........34
Courtesy/Reading ........37,38
Daytime Running ...........34
Exterior ................129
Hazard Warning Flasher ......175
Headlight Switch .........34,35
Headlights .............34,35
High Beam ...............35
Instrument Cluster ........34,35
Intensity Control ............39
Interior ..................38
Map Reading .............37
Park ...................35
Reading .................37
Turn Signal ............36,129
Loading Vehicle .............169
Tires ..................217
Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb
Replacement) .............179
Luggage/Cargo Capacity ........51
Manual, Service .............253
Methanol..................244
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming .........33
Electric Powered ...........33
Electric Remote ............33
Heated .................34
OBD System ................88
Occupant Restraints ..........103
Overheating, Engine...........192
Owner's Manual
(Operator Manual) ..........253
Paintwork (Cleaning And
Maintenance) .............231
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .92
Park Sensors System ..........158
Passive Entry (system) ..........21
Performance (Top Speed) .......249
Pets .....................127
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ...............217
Power
Mirrors .................33
Seats ..................27
Power Supply...............236
Power Windows ..............49
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .108
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............108
Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ......229
Radial Ply T ires ..............222
Radio Frequency
General Information ......16,18,24
Radio Transmitters And Mobile
Phones ...................3
Rear Camera ...............166
Rear Cross Path ..............93
Rear Seats .................29
Rear View Mirrors .............33
Reformulated Gasoline .........244
Refueling Procedure...........168
Refueling The Vehicle ..........168
Refuelling .................246
Reminder, Seat Belt ...........104
Remote Starting System ........131
Replacement Tires............223
Replacing A Bulb ............175
Replacing An External Bulb ......178
Replacing An Internal Bulb......
.178
Reporting
Safety
Defects .......253
Restraint, Head ..............29
Restraints, Child .............118
RimsAndTires..............213
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .....128
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . .129
Safety Defects, Reporting .......253
Safety Information, T ire .........213
Safety Tips ................127
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...........128
Saving Fuel ................171
SBL Function ................36
Scheduled Servicing ..........197
Scheduled Servicing Program
(2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine
Versions) ................198
Seat Belt
Energy Management Feature . . .108
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .106
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........104
Pregnant Women ..........108
Seat Belt Pretensioner .......108
Seat Belt Reminder .........104
Seat Belt Reminder ...........104
Seat Belts ..............103,128
Child Restraint ............118
Front Seat ...........103,104
Inspection ..............128
Pregnant Women ..........108
Pretensioners ............108
Rear Seat ...............104
Untwisting Procedure .......106
Seats .....................26
Adjustment ...............26
Head Restraints ............29
Height Adjustment ..........27
Power ..................27
Tilting ..................27
INDEX
Service Assistance ...........251
Service Contract .............252
Service Manuals .............253
Servicing Procedures ..........206
Shoulder Belts ..............104
Signals, Turn .............36,129
Snow Chains ...............227
Snow Tires ................227
Spare Tire ..............224,225
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............150
Cancel .................151
Resume ................150
Set ...................149
Speed Control
(Cruise Control) .........149,151
Speed Limiter...............148
Starting...................191
Starting And Operating .........191
Starting Procedures ...........191
Starting The Engine ...........131
Steering
Tilt Column ...............31
Wheel, Heated ............32
Wheel, Tilt ...............31
Steering System .............240
Steering Wheel...............31
Stop/Start System............146
Storage ...................56
Suggestions For Driving ........171
Sun Visors..................53
Supplemental Restraint System -
AirBag.................110
Suspension ................239
Symbols....................6
Telescoping Steering Column .....31
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .........52
Tilt Steering Column ...........31
Tire And Loading Information
Placard .................217
Tire Markings ...............213
Tire Safety Information .........213
T
ir
e Service Kit ..............186
Tires............129,220,224,228
Aging (Life Of Tires) .........223
Air Pressure .............220
Changing ...............212
Compact Spare ...........224
Flat Changing ............186
General Information ......220,224
High Speed .............221
Inflation Pressures .........220
Jacking ................212
Life Of T ires .............223
Load Capacity ............217
Quality Grading ...........228
Radial .................222
Replacement .............223
Safety ..............213,220
Sizes ..................214
Snow Tires ..............227
Spare Tire ............224,225
Spinning ...............222
Tread Wear Indicators .......223
To Open Hood ...............50
Tow Hooks, Emergency ........194
Towing
Disabled Vehicle ...........193
Towing Trailers ..............170
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................100
Traction Control System (TCS) .....91
Transmission ...............237
Transporting Animals ..........172
Transporting Passengers........172
Transporting Pets ............127
Tread Wear Indicators..........223
Turn Signals.................
3
6
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......228
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . .106
Use Of The Owner’s Manual .......5
Vehicle Changes/Alterations .......3
Vehicle Identification Number .....234
Vehicle Loading...........169,217
Vent Operation ...............42
Warning Flasher, Hazard ........175
Warranty Information ..........252
Washer Fluid For
Windshield/Headlights........203
Washers, Windshield ...........39
Weights ..................243
Wheel And Wheel Trim .........225
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......225
Wheels And T ires ............213
Windows (Cleaning) ...........231
Windshield Defroster ..........128
Windshield Wiper .............39
Replacing Blades ..........208
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Smart Washing Function .......40
Windshield Wipers ............39
Wrecker Towing .............193
INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017
2017 GIULIA
GIULIA QUADRIFOGLIO
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of
FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.
OWNER’S MANUAL
17GA-126-AC
